Canon MX350 series On-screen Manual Page 1 of 1086 pages How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual MC-4508-V1.00 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Describes the summary of this product. Describes the detailed function of this product.
MX350 series Basic Guide Page 2 of 1086 pages How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual MP-4334-V1.
Overview of the Machine Page 3 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Overview of the Machine Overview of the Machine This section shows the component names of the machine and describes the basic operations you need to know before using it.
Main Components Page 4 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Overview of the Machine > Main Components Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View Operation Panel Front View (1) ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Load a document to copy, scan, or fax. The documents loaded in the Document Tray are scanned automatically one sheet at a time. See Loading Documents in the ADF. (2) Document Feeder Cover Open when clearing jammed documents.
Main Components (9) Document Cover Open to load an original on the Platen Glass. (10) Wi-Fi lamp Lights or flashes blue to indicate the wireless LAN status. Lights: Wireless LAN active is selected. Flashes: Printing or scanning over wireless LAN. Also flashes while searching for wireless LAN access point during setup and when connecting to the access point. (11) Paper Output Tray Opens automatically when printing or copying starts and printed paper is ejected.
Main Components Rear View (16) External Device Jack Connect an external device such as telephone, answering machine, or modem of a computer. Important Do not touch the metal casing. Note Remove the Telephone connector cap to connect the external device. (17) Telephone Line Jack Connect the telephone line. Caution To avoid an electric shock, do not touch the metal casing. (18) Wired LAN Connector Plug in the LAN cable to connect the machine to a LAN. Important Do not touch the metal casing.
Main Components Page 7 of 1086 pages Inside View (21) Ink Cartridge Locking Covers Lock the FINE Cartridges into place. (22) FINE Cartridge Holder Install the FINE Cartridges. The Color FINE Cartridge should be installed into the left slot ( installed into the right slot ( ) and the Black FINE Cartridge should be ). (23) FINE Cartridges (Ink Cartridges) A replaceable cartridge that is integrated with Print Head and ink tank.
Main Components Operation Panel (1) ON button Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the Document Cover is closed. Important Disconnecting the power plug When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power, be sure to confirm that all lamps on the Operation Panel are turned off.
Main Components Page 9 of 1086 pages The LCD will turn off if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes. To restore the display, press any button except the ON button or perform the print operation. The display will be also restored when receiving faxes. (6) , , , and buttons (Scroll Wheel) Used to select a menu or setting item. The or button is also used to enter characters. See Basic Operation in Each Mode. (7) OK button Finalizes the selection of a menu or setting item.
Main Components Page 10 of 1086 pages To change the beep volume, see Machine Settings .
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD Page 11 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Overview of the Machine > How to Navigate Menus on the LCD How to Navigate Menus on the LCD You can use the machine to print photos in a memory card or USB flash drive, make copies, send/ receive faxes, or scan originals without a computer. You can also make good use of the various functions of the machine with the menu screen and the settings screen on the LCD.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD You can print photos saved on a memory card of your digital camera or USB flash drive, or documents (PDF files) scanned with the machine. Setup menu You can maintain the machine, or change settings of the machine. You can also print the template forms such as notebook paper, etc. Selecting a Menu or Setting Item Items (C) that appear at the bottom of a mode screen can be selected using their corresponding Function buttons (D).
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD (K) Press the center Function button. The preview screen will appear. See Making Copies . (L) Press the right Function button. The print settings screen will appear. Note For operations on the settings screen, see Basic Operation on the Settings Screen . Basic Operation on the Settings Screen The displayed screen varies depending on the mode you selected, but the operation is the same.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD Page 14 of 1086 pages Canceling a Fax Transmission/Reception, Copy, Print, or Scan Job You can press the Stop button to cancel a fax transmission/reception, copy, print, or scan job in progress.
Preparing for Faxing Page 15 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing Preparing for Faxing This section describes typical examples of connecting and setting up the machine before using the faxing functions.
Confirming the Telephone Line Connection Page 16 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Confirming the Telephone Line Connection Confirming the Telephone Line Connection For the basic connection of the machine, refer to the printed manual: Getting Started . This guide describes other typical connections. The machine cannot send/receive faxes if the connection is incorrect. Connect the machine correctly.
Confirming the Telephone Line Connection (A) Digital Subscriber Line (B) xDSL modem (splitter may not be built-in to the modem) (C) WAN (Wide Area Network) (D) Broadband router compatible with Internet Telephone (E) Computer (F) Telephone or answering machine (G) LAN (Local Area Network) (H) TEL (I) LINE * Port configurations and names may vary depending on the product. Note When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in Telephone line type.
Confirming the Telephone Line Connection Page 18 of 1086 pages connections, contact the telephone company or service provider to confirm your line type. Note Telephone line type will not appear in countries or regions where Rotary pulse is not supported. You can print User's data list to check the current setting. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . 1. Display the Telephone line type screen. (1) Press the Setup button. (2) Select Device settings , and press the OK button.
Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing Page 19 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing This section describes the basic settings for faxing such as how to register the sender information, to enter numbers and letters, to set daylight saving time, etc.
Sender Information Page 20 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing > Sender Information Sender Information If the unit name and unit fax/telephone number are registered, they are printed with date and time as sender information on the recipient's fax. (A) Date and time of transmission (B) Unit fax/telephone number (C) Unit name (D) The registered recipient's name is printed when sending faxes with the coded speed dial.
Setting the Date and Time Page 21 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing > Setting the Date and Time Setting the Date and Time Note When the machine is connected to a computer with the MP Drivers installed, the date and time setting will be copied from the computer to the machine. As long as the date and time are set accurately on your computer, you do not need to set them on the machine.
Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Page 22 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing > Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Some countries adopt the daylight saving time (summer time) system that shifts the clock time forward at certain periods of the year.
Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Page 23 of 1086 pages (4) Press the OK button. The summer time start date/time will be set. 4. Set the date and time that summer time ends. (1) Select the month, week, and day of the week when summer time ends. Use the or an option. button ( Scroll Wheel) to select the item to change, and use the or button to select (2) Press the OK button. or (3) Use the Numeric buttons or the format) when summer time ends.
Registering User Information Page 24 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing > Registering User Information Registering User Information Important Before sending a fax, be sure to enter your name and fax/telephone number in Unit name and Unit TEL on the User information settings screen (for US only). 1. Display the User information settings screen. (1) Press the Setup button.
Registering User Information * The Tone Page 25 of 1086 pages button and the Redial/Pause button are not available. (2) Press the OK button. 4. Press the FAX button to return to the fax standby screen.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols Page 26 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing > Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols With the Numeric buttons on the machine, you can enter the unit name and the recipient's name for the coded speed dial. The machine has three input modes: uppercase mode, lowercase mode, and numeric mode.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols Page 27 of 1086 pages Note Here describes the procedure to enter the unit name as example. To display the User information settings screen, see Registering User Information . 2. Use the Numeric buttons to enter characters. Press the button repeatedly until the character you want to enter appears. To enter characters (e.g., to enter "EU"): (1) Press the button twice. (2) Press the button twice.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols Page 28 of 1086 pages Page top
Other Basic Settings Page 29 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing > Other Basic Settings Other Basic Settings You can select the following items in FAX user settings of FAX settings. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Auto print When ON is selected, a received fax or Activity report will be printed automatically when the machine received a fax.
Setting the Receive Mode Page 30 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Preparing for Faxing > Setting the Receive Mode Setting the Receive Mode There are four receive modes as follows. TEL priority mode FAX priority mode FAX only mode DRPD*1 or Network switch *2 *1 This setting is only available in US and Canada. *2 This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. See Selecting a Receive Mode to select the appropriate mode.
Setting the Receive Mode Page 31 of 1086 pages telephone company, your telephone company will assign two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to your single telephone line, allowing you to have different numbers for fax calls and voice calls using only one telephone line. Your machine will automatically monitor the ring pattern, and will automatically receive the fax if the ring pattern is a fax call.
Setting the Receive Mode Note Available settings for a fax *2 Set the machine to receive the fax automatically even if you do not pick up the handset. Manual/auto switch Change the number of seconds until the machine starts receiving the fax. RX start time in Manual/auto switch When mainly receiving a fax: FAX priority mode When a call incomes, the telephone will ring. *1 The machine detects whether the call is a fax or voice call automatically.
Setting the Receive Mode Page 33 of 1086 pages Page top
Faxing Page 34 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Faxing Faxing This section describes the basic operation to send or receive faxes with the fax functions of the machine.
Sending Faxes Page 35 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Faxing > Sending Faxes Sending Faxes This section describes dialing and sending faxes directly using the Numeric buttons. For details on other ways to send faxes, see Using Various Sending Functions .
Sending Faxes Page 36 of 1086 pages (3) Press the FAX button. The fax standby screen will appear. 2. Adjust the scan resolution and contrast as necessary. (1) Use the or button (A) to select the scan resolution. Standard: Suitable for text-only documents. Fine: Suitable for fine-print documents. Extra fine: Suitable for detailed illustration or fine-print quality documents.
Sending Faxes (2) Press the Color button for color sending, or the Black button for black & white sending. The machine starts scanning the original. Important Color sending requires that the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing. If the recipient's fax machine does not support color faxing, you can set the machine to send a fax in black-and-white. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . Do not open the Document Cover until scanning is completed. (3) Start sending.
Sending Faxes Page 38 of 1086 pages See step 2 in Sending a Fax with the Numeric Buttons . 3. Select the recipient to redial. (1) Press the Redial/Pause button. The fax/telephone numbers dialed with the Numeric buttons will appear. Note The redial list shows 10 fax/telephone numbers from the latest one. (2) Use the redial. or button (Scroll Wheel ) to select the fax/telephone number to (3) Press the OK button. The selected number will appear on the fax sending screen. 4. Send the fax.
Using Various Sending Functions Page 39 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Faxing > Using Various Sending Functions Using Various Sending Functions You can send a fax in various ways as follows. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Using Various Sending Functions Utility supplied with the machine. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . Sending Same Documents to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting) You can send the same documents to two or more recipients with one operation. The recipients can be specified with the Numeric buttons, coded speed dial, and group dial in combination.
Using Various Sending Functions Page 41 of 1086 pages The machine has various settings for sending faxes as follows. Change the settings as necessary. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. ECM TX Sends faxes in ECM (Error Correction Mode). When the recipient's fax machine is compatible with ECM, the machine resends the fax after correcting errors automatically.
Receiving Faxes Page 42 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Faxing > Receiving Faxes Receiving Faxes This section describes the operation to receive a fax with the machine depending on the receive mode. This section also describes the operation to print documents stored in the memory of the machine such as when ink or paper runs out.
Receiving Faxes (4) Press the OK button. Received faxes will be printed on the paper of the selected size and type. Note The paper settings are shared among the copy mode, fax mode, card mode, and template print. After printing in other modes, confirm or change the paper settings. If a page size other than A4, 8.5"x11" (LTR), or 8.5"x14" (Legal), or a media type other than Plain paper is selected, faxes or reports cannot be printed.
Receiving Faxes You can receive faxes only by picking up the handset under the conditions below. To receive a fax without picking up the handset, select ON for Manual/auto switch. - The telephone has no answering function. - If the telephone has an answering function, it is deactivated. Other options Set the machine to receive the fax automatically even if you do not pick up the handset. See Settings for Receiving Faxes . Change the number of seconds until the machine starts receiving the fax.
Receiving Faxes The machine will receive the fax automatically. Note Other options Change the number of times to ring the telephone. See Settings for Receiving Faxes . When the call is a voice call: The telephone will ring when a call incomes. When the machine detects a voice call, the machine will ring. (1) Pick up the handset, and press the Stop button to talk on the telephone. Important When the machine rings, pick up the handset before pressing the Stop button.
Receiving Faxes Note If a telephone is connected to the machine, the telephone will ring when a call incomes. When DRPD or Network switch is selected: When the call is a fax: The telephone will ring when a call incomes. The machine will receive the fax automatically when the fax ring pattern is detected. Note Other options Change the number of times to ring the telephone. See Settings for Receiving Faxes . When the call is a voice call: The telephone will ring when a call incomes.
Receiving Faxes Page 47 of 1086 pages Note To use this feature, you need to subscribe to a compatible service provided by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for details. For DRPD You need to select the appropriate ring pattern on the machine. For details, see Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only) . For Network switch The name of this service varies depending on the country or region of purchase.
Receiving Faxes Page 48 of 1086 pages Select A4, 8.5"x11" (LTR), or 8.5"x14" (Legal) for Page size. See Preparing for Receiving a Fax . A media type other than Plain paper is selected for Type in the fax paper settings. Select Plain paper for Type. See Preparing for Receiving a Fax . You pressed the Stop button to cancel printing of a fax. Press the FAX button to resume printing of the fax. Note The machine can store up to approximately 50 pages* (max.20 documents) of faxes in memory.
Receiving Faxes Page 49 of 1086 pages Select Delete all documents in memory to delete all documents in the memory at the same time. Select Save specified document to save a specified document on the memory card or USB flash drive. Select Save all documents to save all documents in the memory on the memory card or USB flash drive. (2) Select Yes, and press the OK button. The machine starts printing documents in the memory one by one. (3) To delete the printed document, select Yes.
Using Various Receiving Functions Page 50 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Faxing > Using Various Receiving Functions Using Various Receiving Functions The machine has various receiving functions as follows. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Fax Reception Rejection The machine can be set to reject faxes from specific senders.
Using Various Receiving Functions Page 51 of 1086 pages Manual/auto switch Receives faxes automatically after the external telephone rings a specified length of time when the receive mode is set to TEL priority mode. RX image reduction Reduces to print received faxes automatically so that they fit in the selected page size. RX start speed Selects the fax receiving speed. RX report Prints a reception report automatically after the machine receives faxes.
Using Useful Fax Functions Page 52 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Faxing > Using Useful Fax Functions Using Useful Fax Functions The machine has various fax functions as follows. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Print reports/lists Press the left Function button on the fax standby screen to select Print reports/lists menu. The various kinds of reports or lists can be printed.
Printing from a Memory Card Page 53 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from a Memory Card Printing from a Memory Card You can preview photos or documents (PDF files) from a memory card or USB flash drive on the LCD, to select and print the desired photo or document. You can also print your favorite photos in various layouts or use them for making a sticker.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Advanced Guide Page 54 of 1086 pages Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Preview each photo from the memory card or USB flash drive on the LCD, to select and print the desired photo. This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive 2. Page 55 of 1086 pages Insert a memory card or USB flash drive. Memory card: Insert it WITH THE LABELED SIDE FACING TO THE LEFT into the Card Slot. For the types of memory card compatible with the machine and locations to insert them, see Memory Card. Inserting the USB flash drive: Insert it into the Direct Print Port. See Inserting the USB Flash Drive.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Page 56 of 1086 pages (A) USB flash drive (B) Memory card Note If the document selection screen in Select doc. print appears, there are no photos on the memory card or USB flash drive. For printing the document (PDF file), refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . Do not insert memory card and USB flash drive at the same time. Also do not insert two or more memory cards at the same time.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive the OK button, "01" is set for the number of copies and the screen to change the number of copies will appear. Use the or button ( Scroll Wheel) or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies, and press the OK button to return to the screen in (1). 4. Start printing. (1) Press the right Function button (E) to select Print settings, and confirm the page size, media type, print quality, etc.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Changing the Settings If you press the right Function button to select Print settings on the photo selection screen, the print settings screen will appear. or button (Scroll Wheel ) to select the item, such as page size, media type, or print You can use the or quality, and use the button to change the setting. For the setting operation, see Basic Operation on the Settings Screen . For the print settings of Select doc.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive Page 59 of 1086 pages correct the settings.
Using Various Functions Page 60 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Various Functions Using Various Functions You can print photos in various ways when you select Special photo print You can also use the useful functions to print photos. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. in Menu of the card mode.
Using Various Functions Page 61 of 1086 pages Correcting Photos If Auto photo fix is selected for Photo fix on the print settings screen, the selected photos will be corrected automatically. Auto photo fix Printing Photos with Shot Date or File Number If ON is selected for Print date or Print file no. on the print settings screen, the selected photos can be printed with shot date or file number. Print date Print file no.
Inserting the Memory Card Page 62 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Inserting the Memory Card Inserting the Memory Card Before Inserting the Memory Card The following types of memory cards and image data or documents (PDF files) are compatible with the machine.
Inserting the Memory Card Page 63 of 1086 pages xD-Picture Card Type H *2 RS-MMC *3 MMCmobile *3 Memory Stick Micro *1 *2 *3 *4 *4 Use the special "SD Card Adapter". Requires purchase of a separate compact flash card adapter for xD-Picture Card. Use the special card adapter. Use the special Duo size adapter or full size adapter. Printable Image Data This machine accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system (Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant), TIFF (Exif 2.2/2.
Inserting the Memory Card 1. Page 64 of 1086 pages Prepare your memory card. Attach a special card adapter if your memory card requires one. See Memory Cards that Require a Card Adapter . 2. Make sure that the power is turned on, and open the Card Slot Cover. 3. Insert only one memory card into the Card Slot. The location to insert a memory card varies depending on each type of memory card.
Inserting the Memory Card Insert the following types of memory cards into the right Card Slot: Compact Flash (CF) Card, Microdrive xD-Picture Card , xD-Picture Card Type M , xD-Picture Card Type H Important Part of the memory card will protrude from the Card Slot, but do not force it into the slot any further. This can damage the machine or the memory card. Make sure that the memory card is correctly oriented before inserting it into the Card Slot.
Inserting the Memory Card 2. Page 66 of 1086 pages Make sure that the Access lamp is lit, and remove the memory card. Hold the part of the memory card that is protruding and remove it straightforward from the machine. Important Do not remove the memory card while the Access lamp is flashing. The Access lamp flashes while the machine is reading or writing data from/to the memory card.
Inserting the USB Flash Drive Page 67 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Inserting the USB Flash Drive Inserting the USB Flash Drive Inserting the USB Flash Drive Note Before inserting the USB flash drive If your USB flash drive cannot be inserted into the Direct Print Port of the machine, you may be required to use an extension cable for the USB flash drive. Purchase it at electronics retail stores.
Inserting the USB Flash Drive Page 68 of 1086 pages Page top
Copying Page 69 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Copying Copying You can copy in the various methods such as enlarging/reducing or copying two original pages onto a single sheet of paper.
Making Copies Page 70 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Contents > Copying > Making Copies Making Copies This section describes the procedure to copy a document of A4 size on plain paper. For the operation, see the notes and operation procedure described in the reference page. You need to prepare: Originals to copy. See Originals You Can Load . Paper for printing. See Media Types You Can Use . 1. Prepare for copying. (1) Make sure that the power is turned on. See Operation Panel .
Making Copies Page 71 of 1086 pages (5) Load an original on the Platen Glass or in the ADF. See Loading Originals. To load the original on the Platen Glass, align it with the alignment mark FACING DOWN as shown below. WITH THE SIDE TO COPY Then close the Document Cover gently. Note For details on the types and conditions of the original which can be copied, and how to load the original in the ADF, see Loading Originals.
Making Copies (4) Press the right Function button (C) to select Print settings, and confirm the page size, media type, etc. Here we confirm that A4 is selected for Page size and Plain paper for Type. To change the settings, use the button ( Scroll Wheel) (A) to select the item to change, and use or the button (B) to select an option. After confirming or changing the settings, press the OK button or to return to the copy standby screen. See Basic Operation on the Settings Screen and Changing the Settings .
Making Copies (1) Magnif. (Magnification) Specify the enlargement/reduction manner. You can specify the copy scale by selecting the page size: A4 to A5, A4 to B5, etc. If you do not want to enlarge/reduce the page size, select SameMagnification. (2) Intensity Specify the intensity when you want to make the darkened/lightened copy. Select Auto to automatically adjust the intensity according to the original. When Auto is selected, the ADF is not available.
Making Copies Page 74 of 1086 pages If you select Fast with the media type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as good as expected, select Standard or High and then try copying again.
Using Various Copy Functions Page 75 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Copying > Using Various Copy Functions Using Various Copy Functions You can make various kinds of copies, such as making borderless copies or copying two pages onto a single sheet, if you press the left Function button to select Copy menu on the copy standby screen. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Using Various Copy Functions Binding margin copy Page 76 of 1086 pages Punch hole removal Note Printing the date and/or page number You can print the current date and/or sequential page number on each copy. Press the right Function button to select Print settings on the copy standby screen, then select ON for Print date and/or Print page no.. These settings can be used in combination with other copy functions.
Scanning Page 77 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Scanning Scanning You can save or forward scanned data to your computer, and edit or process them with the supplied software application. You can also save scanned data on a memory card or USB flash drive inserted into the machine.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer Page 78 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to the Computer Saving Scanned Data to the Computer You can save or forward scanned data to the computer with the USB cable or via a network. This section describes the procedure to detect the type of original automatically with Auto scan, and save the scanned data to the computer connecting with the USB cable, according to the settings specified with MP Navigator EX.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer Page 79 of 1086 pages See Operation Panel . (2) Press the SCAN button. If you specified the same computer to save scanned data last time, go to (5). (3) Use the button. or button (Scroll Wheel) to select PC , and press the OK The computer selection screen will appear. Besides saving scanned data on the computer, you can save them on a memory card or USB flash drive, or attach them to E-mail on the computer.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer When scanning from the ADF with the saving format set to PDF, all documents loaded in the ADF are saved to a single PDF file on the computer. Remove the original on the Platen Glass or the Document Output Slot after scanning is completed. Important Do not turn off the power while the machine is operating. Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable or LAN cable while the machine is scanning originals with the computer.
Saving Scanned Data to the Computer Page 81 of 1086 pages Select the orientation of the original to be scanned from the ADF: Portrait or Landscp.. (6) Reduce show-thru *2 Reduce show-through of the opposite side of a text document, or lighten the color of recycled paper, newspaper, etc. (7) Descreen *2 Reduce the moire effect when uneven gradations or stripe patterns appear on the original to be scanned.
Using Various Scan Functions Page 82 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Scanning > Using Various Scan Functions Using Various Scan Functions Besides saving scanned data to the computer, you can save them on a memory card or USB flash drive, or attach them to E-mail on the computer, if you press the left Function button to select Save/Forward on the scan standby screen. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Printing from Your Computer Page 83 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer Printing from Your Computer This section describes the procedure to print documents or photos with a computer. You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy-PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine.
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Page 84 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy-PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine. This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper. For details on Easy-PhotoPrint EX, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) 3. Select a photo to print. (1) Select the folder in which images are saved. (2) Click the image to print. The number of copies appears as "1", and the image you selected appears in the selected image area (A). You can select two or more images at the same time. Note To print two or more copies, click (Up arrow) to change the number of copies. To cancel the selection, click the image to cancel in the selected image area (A) and click (Delete Imported Image) (B).
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) 5. Page 86 of 1086 pages Select a layout and start printing. (1) Select the layout of the photo. Here we select Borderless (full). The preview will appear in the selected layout for confirmation of the required print result. Note You can change the direction of photo or crop photos to print. For details on the operation, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . (2) Click Print.
Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 87 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) > Using Various Functions of EasyPhotoPrint EX Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX This section introduces a few of the useful functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Creating Your Own Prints You can create an album or calendar using your photos.
Printing Documents Page 88 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Documents Printing Documents This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide. Note Operations may vary depending on your software application. For details on the operation, refer to the instruction manual of your application.
Printing Documents The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also appear. When you specify two or more copies in Copies, the Collate check box will be selected. (2) Make sure of the displayed settings. Here we make sure that Plain Paper in Media Type, Standard in Print Quality, and A4 in Printer Paper Size are selected. Note The settings can be changed.
Printing Documents Page 90 of 1086 pages Note The message on how to load envelopes will appear when printing on them. This message will not appear next time if you select the Do not show this message again. check box. For details on the settings to print envelopes, see Loading Envelopes. To cancel a print job in progress, press the Stop button on the machine or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor.
Other Usages Page 91 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages Other Usages This section introduces the procedure to print the template forms such as notebook paper, etc., the setting items of the machine, and the function to print directly from a digital camera or mobile phone. This section also introduces useful software applications you can use with the machine.
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper Page 92 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper This section describes the procedure to select and print the template forms. You need to prepare: A4, B5, or Letter-sized plain paper. See Media Types You Can Use . 1. Prepare for printing. (1) Make sure that the power is turned on. See Operation Panel .
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper 3. Page 93 of 1086 pages Start printing. (1) Use the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies. (2) Use the , , , or button to select Page size and Type. Note You can only select A4, B5, or 8.5"x11" (LTR) for Page size. B5 may not be available depending on the selected template form. You can only select Plain paper for Type.
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper Page 94 of 1086 pages Monthly schedule Calendar type Page top
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone Advanced Guide Page 95 of 1086 pages Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device You can connect the PictBridge compliant device to this machine with a USB cable that is recommended by the device's manufacturer, and print saved images directly.
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone Page 96 of 1086 pages For details on the operation, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Machine Settings Page 97 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Machine Settings Machine Settings This section describes the items you can set or change in Device settings of Setup menu. For details on setting or changing, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . FAX settings FAX user settings Configures the basic settings for faxing, such as auto print, user information settings, volume control, telephone line type, etc.
Machine Settings Other settings Configures other network settings including the machine's network name, IPv4/IPv6 setting, memory card sharing, WSD (Web Services on Devices) setting, etc. Reset LAN settings Sets the machine network settings back to the default. Device user settings Date/time setting Sets the current date and time. Date display format Selects the format of date that is displayed on the LCD or printed on faxes or copies.
Machine Settings Page 99 of 1086 pages Mobile phone print settings Specifies paper or image correction when you print from the wireless communication device. This setting appears only when the optional Bluetooth Unit is connected to the machine. Bluetooth settings Changes the Bluetooth settings, such as the device name or passkey. This setting appears only when the optional Bluetooth Unit is connected to the machine. PictBridge print settings Specifies paper, print quality, etc.
Useful Software Applications Page 100 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Other Usages > Useful Software Applications Useful Software Applications The machine can be used with useful software applications such as Solution Menu, My Printer, and Easy -WebPrint EX. Solution Menu With Solution Menu, you can start the software applications supplied with the machine or display the operating instructions. Double-click (Solution Menu) on the desktop.
Useful Software Applications Page 101 of 1086 pages Note You can also start My Printer from Solution Menu or the taskbar. Install My Printer from the Setup CD-ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled. To install My Printer, select My Printer in Custom Install. To start My Printer from the Start menu, select All Programs (or Programs), Canon Utilities, My Printer, then My Printer. Easy-WebPrint EX Easy-WebPrint EX provides quick and easy printing of web pages for Internet Explorer.
Useful Software Applications For details on printing web pages, click Page 102 of 1086 pages (Help) to view the online help. Note Installing Easy-WebPrint EX If Easy-WebPrint EX is not installed, the guidance for installation of Easy-WebPrint EX may appear in the notification area of the taskbar. To install Easy-WebPrint EX, click the displayed guidance and follow the instructions on the screen. You can also install Easy-WebPrint EX from the Setup CD-ROM .
Loading Paper / Originals Page 103 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals Loading Paper / Originals This section describes types of paper or originals you can load, how to load printing paper in the Rear Tray, and how to load originals to copy, fax, or scan.
Loading Paper Page 104 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper Loading Paper Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper Loading Envelopes Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper Important If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm, 4" x 8" / 101.6 x 203.2 mm, 5" x 7" / 13 x 18 cm, or 2.16" x 3.58" / 55.0 x 91.0 mm (Card size) to perform trial print, it can cause paper jams.
Loading Paper Page 105 of 1086 pages (3) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to open them, and load the paper in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING YOU. (4) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to align them with both sides of the paper stack. Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard. The paper may not be fed properly. Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation (B). Loading paper in the landscape orientation (C) can cause paper jams.
Loading Paper Page 106 of 1086 pages Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark (D). Note The machine may make operating noise when feeding paper. After loading paper When using the machine to copy or print without a computer, select the size and type of the loaded paper for Page size and Type on the print settings screen. See Changing the Settings in "Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive" or Changing the Settings in "Making Copies".
Loading Envelopes Page 107 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Loading Envelopes Loading Envelopes You can print on European DL and US #10 envelopes. The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying with the printer driver properly. Important You can only print on envelopes with the computer. Do not use the following envelopes.
Loading Envelopes Page 108 of 1086 pages (2) Open the Paper Output Tray gently. (3) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to open them, and load the envelopes in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU. The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side. Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once. (4) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to align them with both sides of the envelopes. Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard. The envelopes may not be fed properly.
Loading Envelopes Page 109 of 1086 pages (2) Select DL Env. or Comm. Env. #10 in the Envelope Size Setting window. (3) Select Landscape in Orientation. Important If you do not specify the envelope size or orientation properly, the address will be printed upside down or will be turned to 90 degrees. Note The machine may make operating noise when feeding envelopes.
Media Types You Can Use Page 110 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Can Use Choose paper suitable for printing, for the best print results. Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of printing, such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document. We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos.
Media Types You Can Use Page 111 of 1086 pages - Media type settings Operation Panel: Pro Platinum Printer driver: Photo Paper Pro Platinum Photo Paper Pro II - Media type settings Operation Panel: Pro II Printer driver: Photo Paper Pro II Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" - Media type settings Operation Panel: Glossy Printer driver: Glossy Photo Paper Photo Paper Glossy - Media type settings Operation Panel: Glossy Printer driver: Glossy Photo Paper Photo Paper Plus Glossy
Media Types You Can Use Page 112 of 1086 pages Available only when printing from your computer.
Media Types You Can Use Page 113 of 1086 pages Non-standard sizes: You can also specify a custom size within the following range. Minimum size: 2.17 x 3.58 inches / 55.0 x 91.0 mm Maximum size: 8.50 x 26.61 inches / 215.9 x 676.0 mm Paper Weight 17 to 28 lb / 64 to 105 g/m 2 (except for Canon genuine paper) Do not use heavier or lighter paper (except for Canon genuine paper), as it could jam in the machine.
Media Types You Cannot Use Page 114 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Media Types You Cannot Use Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but also the machine to jam or malfunction.
Loading Originals Page 115 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals Loading Originals This section describes the procedure to load originals on the Platen Glass and in the ADF. Position to Load Originals Loading Originals on the Platen Glass How to Load Originals for Each Function Loading Documents in the ADF Originals You Can Load Position to Load Originals The machine has two positions to load originals: Platen Glass and ADF.
Loading Originals on the Platen Glass Page 116 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > Loading Originals on the Platen Glass Loading Originals on the Platen Glass You can load originals to copy, fax, or scan on the Platen Glass. You may have to load the original in a different position depending on the function you selected in the copy mode or scan mode. Load the original in the correct position according to the selected function.
Loading Originals on the Platen Glass Page 117 of 1086 pages Page top
How to Load Originals for Each Function Page 118 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > How to Load Originals for Each Function How to Load Originals for Each Function Loading the Original to Be Aligned with the Alignment Mark Load originals to copy or fax In the scan mode, - select Auto scan for Doc. type to scan text documents, magazines, or newspapers - select Document or Photo for Doc.
How to Load Originals for Each Function Page 119 of 1086 pages (B) 0.12 inches / 3.0 mm (C) 0.20 inches / 5.0 mm (D) 0.13 inches / 3.4 mm (0.25 inches / 6.4 mm for Letter and Legal-sized paper) (E) 0.13 inches / 3.4 mm (0.25 inches / 6.3 mm for Letter and Legal-sized paper) Loading Only One Original in the Center of the Platen Glass In the scan mode, - select Auto scan for Doc. type to scan one printed photo, postcard, business card, or DVD/ CD - select Document or Photo for Doc.
How to Load Originals for Each Function Page 120 of 1086 pages (A) 0.4 inches / 10 mm Note The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle of up to approximately 10 degrees. Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 inches / 180 mm or more cannot be corrected. Non-rectangular or irregular shaped photos (such as cut out photos) may not be scanned properly.
Loading Documents in the ADF Page 121 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > Loading Documents in the ADF Loading Documents in the ADF You can load documents to copy, fax, or scan in the ADF. Note To scan a document at optimum quality, load it on the Platen Glass. 1. Make sure that any original has been removed from the Platen Glass. 2. Load a document in the ADF. (1) Open the Document Tray.
Loading Documents in the ADF Page 122 of 1086 pages Page top
Originals You Can Load Page 123 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > Originals You Can Load Originals You Can Load The originals you can load on the Platen Glass or in the ADF for copying, scanning, or faxing are as follows: ADF Platen Glass Text document, magazine, Types of originals or newspaper Multipage plain-paper documents of the same size, thickness, and weight Printed photo, postcard, business card, or DVD/ CD Documents tha
Originals You Can Load Page 124 of 1086 pages Page top
Routine Maintenance Page 125 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance This section describes the procedure to clean the machine when the print result is faint, to replace FINE Cartridges when they run out of ink, or to take an action when paper does not feed properly.
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 126 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly, the print head nozzles (FINE Cartridges) are probably clogged. Follow the procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern, check the print head nozzle condition, then clean the Print Head.
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 127 of 1086 pages Note If the problem is still not resolved after replacing the FINE Cartridge, contact the service center. When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned: See Aligning the Print Head . Note You can also perform the maintenance operations from your computer. For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 128 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles. Note If the remaining ink level is low, the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly. Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low.
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 129 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the Print Head if necessary. 1. Check if there are missing lines in the pattern (1) or horizontal white streaks in the pattern (2).
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 130 of 1086 pages (1) The cleaning is required. Select Also B and press the OK button. The cleaning confirmation screen will appear. (2) Select Yes and press the OK button. The machine starts cleaning the Print Head. See Cleaning the Print Head .
Cleaning the Print Head Page 131 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Clean the Print Head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the Print Head consumes ink, so clean the Print Head only when necessary.
Cleaning the Print Head Page 132 of 1086 pages Page top
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 133 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Print Head, clean the Print Head deeply. Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head, so clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary.
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 134 of 1086 pages Note To use other available functions, press the corresponding mode button.
Aligning the Print Head Page 135 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position. Note If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly. Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low.
Aligning the Print Head Page 136 of 1086 pages Important Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet. Be careful not to get the print head alignment sheet dirty. If the sheet is stained or wrinkled, it may not be scanned properly. (5) When the message "Did the patterns print correctly?" appears, confirm that the pattern is printed correctly, select Yes, then press the OK button. 5. Scan the print head alignment sheet to adjust the print head position.
Aligning the Print Head Page 137 of 1086 pages The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet, and the print head position will be adjusted automatically. Important Do not open the Document Cover or remove the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass until adjusting the print head position is completed. If the message "Failed to scan head alignment sheet." appears, press the OK button. Refer to "Troubleshooting" in the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 138 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > Replacing a FINE Cartridge Replacing a FINE Cartridge When remaining ink cautions or errors occur, the message will appear to inform you of the error. Refer to "An Error Message is Displayed on the LCD" in " Troubleshooting " of the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide , and take an appropriate action.
Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 139 of 1086 pages Print Head, which may be necessary to maintain the machine's performance. When ink runs out, replace the FINE Cartridge immediately with a new one. 1. Make sure that the power is turned on, and open the Paper Output Tray gently. 2. Lift the Scanning Unit (Cover), then hold it open with the Scanning Unit Support (C). The FINE Cartridge Holder moves to the replacement position. Caution Do not hold the FINE Cartridge Holder to stop or move it forcibly.
Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 140 of 1086 pages Important Handle FINE Cartridges carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area. Discard empty FINE Cartridges according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables. 4. Prepare the new FINE Cartridge. (1) Take a new FINE Cartridge out of its package and remove the orange protective tape (D) gently. Important If you shake a FINE Cartridge, ink may spill out and stain your hands and the surrounding area.
Replacing a FINE Cartridge Page 141 of 1086 pages (E) Closed correctly (F) Not closed correctly (the cover is tilted) Important The machine cannot print unless both the Color and Black FINE Cartridges are installed. Be sure to install both the FINE Cartridges. 6. Lift the Scanning Unit (Cover) slightly to set the Scanning Unit Support back to its original position, and gently close the Scanning Unit (Cover).
Checking the Ink Status Page 142 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > Replacing a FINE Cartridge > Checking the Ink Status Checking the Ink Status You can check the ink status on the LCD. Note The ink level detector is mounted on the machine to detect the remaining ink level. The machine considers as ink is full when a new FINE Cartridge is installed, and then starts to detect a remaining ink level.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 143 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Routine Maintenance > Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller If the Paper Feed Roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly. In this case, clean the Paper Feed Roller. Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Roller, so perform this only when necessary. You need to prepare: three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper 1.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 144 of 1086 pages Page top
Appendix Page 145 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Appendix Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page top
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Advanced Guide Page 146 of 1086 pages Troubleshooting Contents > Appendix > Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images It may be unlawful to make copies of, scan, print, or use reproductions of the following documents. The list provided is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 147 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Contents > Appendix > Tips on How to Use Your Machine Tips on How to Use Your Machine This section introduces the tips on how to use your machine and for printing with optimal quality. Ink is used for various purposes. How is ink used for various purposes other than printing? Ink may be used for purposes other than printing.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 148 of 1086 pages Tip!: After loading paper, be sure to specify the paper settings! After loading paper, be sure to select the loaded paper for Type with the Operation Panel or Media Type with the printer driver. If the type of paper is not selected, you may not be able to get the satisfactory print result. See Loading Paper .
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 149 of 1086 pages Tip!: Carefully choose the area to place the machine! Note when you place the machine near other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps Place the machine at least 5.91 inches / 15 cm away from other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps. If the machine is placed closer to those, it may not be able to work properly due to fluorescent noises.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine Page 150 of 1086 pages Colors are uneven, and print results are blurred. Tip!: Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the nozzles are clogged. If the print head nozzles are clogged, colors may become uneven or the print results may be blurred. In this case Print the nozzle check pattern Check the printed check pattern to see if the nozzles are clogged. See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect .
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 151 of 1086 pages MC-4547-V1.
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 152 of 1086 pages Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjusting Images Correct/Enhance Images Window Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? How Do I Print with Even Margins? What Is "C1" or "C4"? Photo Print Settings Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on P
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 153 of 1086 pages Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp/Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 154 of 1086 pages Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print) Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print) Print all photos Photo Index print DPOF print Captured info print Using Useful Display Functions Changing the Display Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) Printing PDF File Saved on a Memory Card Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Printing from a USB Flash Drive Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive Setting It
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 155 of 1086 pages Scanning Scanning Images Scanning Images Before Scanning Placing Documents Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail Setting Items on the Operatio
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 156 of 1086 pages Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab View & Use Images on your Computer Tab Custom Scan with One-click Tab Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Stack of Documents (ADF) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Stack of Documents (ADF)) Save Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box PDF Settings Dialog Box Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) View & Use Window Create/Edit PDF file W
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 157 of 1086 pages Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 158 of 1086 pages Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy) Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on1 Copy) Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy) Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat) Making Multiple Copies of an Entire Document (Collated Copy) Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase) Copying on Stickers (Sticker Copy) Copying with Binding Margin (Binding Margin Copy) Removing Punch Hole Marks (Punch Hole Removal Copy) Faxin
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 159 of 1086 pages Remote Reception Rejecting Fax Reception Registering/Editing/Deleting the Rejected Number on the TEL Number Registration Screen Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls Document Stored in Memory Printing a Document in Memory Deleting a Document in Memory Saving a Document in Memory to a Memory Card/ USB Flash Drive Summary of Reports and Lists Using Speed Dial Utility About Speed Dial Utility Starting Up Speed Dial Utility Speed Dial Utility Dialog b
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 160 of 1086 pages faster" Message Is Displayed Print Results Not Satisfactory Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/ White Streaks Colors Are Unclear Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Printing Does Not Start Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 161 of 1086 pages Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet. Is Displayed Cannot print the selected photo.
MX350 series Advanced Guide Page 162 of 1086 pages Telephone Disconnects During a Call If You Cannot Resolve the Problem FAQs Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) General Notes (Scanner Driver) General Notes (Fax Driver) Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Using MP Navigator EX About Solution Menu
How to Use This Manual Page 163 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Explanation Window Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document Trademarks Page top
Operating the Contents Pane Page 164 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Contents Pane When you click a document title displayed in the contents pane found to the left of the on-screen manual, the documents of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side. When you click found to the left of , the document titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed. Note Click to close or display the contents pane.
Operating the Explanation Window Page 165 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Operating the Explanation Window Operating the Explanation Window Explanation Window (1) Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding document. (2) The cursor jumps to the top of this document. Window Used in Operation Explanation This on-screen manual describes with a window displayed when the Windows Vista operating system (called Windows Vista below) is used.
Printing This Manual Page 166 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Printing This Manual Printing This Manual Click to display the print pane to the left of the on-screen manual. Note Click to close or display the print pane. When you click and then click Page Setup, the Page Setup dialog box appears. You can then easily set up the paper to be used for printing. Click , and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box.
Printing This Manual Page 167 of 1086 pages Print All Documents Note You can select the type to be printed, and then easily specify print settings on the Print Setup tab. Print Current Document You can print the currently displayed document. 1. From Select Target, select Current Document The title of the currently displayed document is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list. Note By selecting Print linked documents, you can also print documents that are linked to the current document.
Printing This Manual Page 168 of 1086 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes. All documents with selected check boxes are printed. Print My Manual You can select and print documents registered in My Manual. For details about My Manual, see " Registering Documents to My Manual ." 1. From Select Target, select My Manual The titles of the documents that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list. 2.
Printing This Manual Page 169 of 1086 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes. All documents are printed. Important A large amount of paper is necessary to print all documents. Before printing, be sure to check the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box. The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the zoom rate.
Using Keywords to Find a Document Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Using Keywords to Find a Document Using Keywords to Find a Document You can enter a keyword to search for a target document. All documents in the currently displayed on-screen manual are searched. 1. Click The search pane is displayed to the left of the on-screen manual. Note Click to close or display the search pane. 2. Enter a keyword In Keyword, enter a keyword for the item to be checked.
Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 171 of 1086 pages The search is started, and the titles of documents containing the keyword are displayed in the search results list. When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords, the search results are displayed as shown below.
Registering Documents to My Manual Page 172 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Registering Documents to My Manual Registering Documents to My Manual Register frequently read documents as My Manual documents so that you can refer to those documents easily at any time. 1. Display the document Display the document to be added to My Manual. 2. Click The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on-screen manual. Note Click to close or display the My Manual pane. 3.
Registering Documents to My Manual Page 173 of 1086 pages 4. Display My Manual When you double-click (or select and press Enter key) a document title displayed in List of My Manual, that document is displayed in the explanation window. Note To delete a document from List of My Manual, select that document title from the list, and then click Delete (or press Delete key).
Symbols Used in This Document Page 174 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Symbols Used in This Document Symbols Used in This Document Warning Instructions that, if ignored, could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation. Caution Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment.
Trademarks Page 175 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Trademarks Trademarks Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Printing from a Computer Page 176 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer Printing from a Computer Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Page top
Printing with the Bundled Application Software Page 177 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with the Bundled Application Software What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Printing Photos Creating an Album Printing Calendars Printing Stickers Printing Layout Correcting and Enhancing Photos Questions and Answers Photo Print Settings Other Settings Page top
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Page 178 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras. You can also print borderless photos easily. Important Easy-PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers.
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX? Page 179 of 1086 pages The Photo Print function is available with the following applications: MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.0 or later Digital Photo Professional Ver.3.2 or later Important Easy-PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo Professional: - Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen. - Images cannot be corrected/enhanced. - Image display order cannot be changed.
Printing Photos Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos Printing Photos Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts. You can also create borderless photos easily. Corrections suitable for photos can be applied automatically when printing. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting a Photo 3. Selecting the Paper 4.
Printing Photos Page 181 of 1086 pages Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 182 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting a Photo Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Photo Print from Menu. The Select Images screen appears. Important The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows: - A black line appears along an edge of the image. - An edge of the image appears cropped.
Selecting a Photo Page 184 of 1086 pages (Delete Imported Image). To delete all images from the selected image area, click To print two or more copies of an image, click (Delete All Imported Images). (Up arrow) until the number of copies you want is reached. To reduce the number of copies shown in the box, click (Down arrow). You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen. You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name.
Selecting the Paper Page 185 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Selecting the Paper Selecting the Paper 1. Click Select Paper. The Select Paper screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Note The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer. See Help for details.
Printing Page 186 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Printing Printing 1. Click Layout/Print. The Layout/Print screen appears. Important The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows: - A black line appears along an edge of the image. - An edge of the image appears cropped.
Printing Page 187 of 1086 pages Note You can crop images or print dates on photos. Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing. Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can specify advanced Photo Print settings (number of copies, print quality, etc.) in the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog box, click (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu.
Creating an Album Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album Creating an Album Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Creating an Album Page 189 of 1086 pages How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 190 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 191 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Album from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page album Page number Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 192 of 1086 pages 4. If you want to change the layout, click Layout.... The Change Layout dialog box appears. In the Change Layout dialog box, you can change the layout or select whether to print the date (on which the picture was taken) on the photo. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, Double page album, or the type of page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
Selecting a Photo Page 193 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Selecting a Photo To delete all images from the selected image area, click Page 194 of 1086 pages (Delete All Imported Images). Note See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Editing Page 195 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit your album if necessary.
Editing Page 196 of 1086 pages C4: Back cover "C2"/"C3" appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank/Leave the inside of back cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box. Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Printing Page 197 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 198 of 1086 pages 3. Click Print. Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing Calendars Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars Printing Calendars Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Printing Calendars Page 200 of 1086 pages Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 201 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 202 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Calendar from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Start from Period Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected. You can add holidays to your calendar. Setting Holidays 3.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 203 of 1086 pages See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Selecting a Photo Page 204 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). 3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click (Import to Inside Pages).
Editing Page 205 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the calendar if necessary.
Editing Page 206 of 1086 pages See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Printing Page 207 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 208 of 1086 pages Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing Stickers Page 209 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 210 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 211 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Stickers from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected.
Selecting a Photo Page 212 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). 3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click (Import to Inside Pages).
Editing Page 213 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the stickers if necessary.
Printing Page 214 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 215 of 1086 pages Page top
Printing Layout Page 216 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts. Steps 1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 2. Selecting the Paper and Layout 3. Selecting a Photo 4. Editing 5.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 217 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX 1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX > Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 218 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting the Paper and Layout 1. Click Layout Print from Menu. The Page Setup screen appears. 2. Set the following items in the General Settings section: Paper Size Orientation Print date Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected. You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.
Selecting a Photo Page 219 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Selecting a Photo Selecting a Photo 1. Click Select Images. The Select Images screen appears. 2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area. The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures). 3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click (Import to Inside Pages).
Editing Page 220 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Editing Editing 1. Click Edit. The Edit screen appears. 2. Edit the layout if necessary.
Printing Page 221 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Printing Printing 1. Click Print Settings. The Print Settings screen appears. 2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used: Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Printing Page 222 of 1086 pages Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 223 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images. Click (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print. You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 224 of 1086 pages Adjusting Images Page top
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 225 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Auto Photo Fix Function This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections. Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 226 of 1086 pages Note If only one image is selected, the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview. 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. 4. Click Auto Photo Fix, then click OK. The entire photo is corrected automatically and the the upper left of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Page 227 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Using the Red-Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash. You can perform the Red-Eye Correction function either automatically or manually. Note Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Page 228 of 1086 pages Auto Correction 3. Make sure that Auto is selected. 4. Click Red-Eye Correction. 5. Click OK. Red eyes are corrected and the the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of Important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image. Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function Red eye is corrected and the Page 229 of 1086 pages (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result. Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected images as new files.
Using the Face Brightener Function Page 230 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background. Note You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo Fix.
Using the Face Brightener Function Page 231 of 1086 pages 4. Click Face Brightener. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener. Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the image. The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter, and the (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Using the Face Brightener Function Page 232 of 1086 pages Page top
Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 233 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo. You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 234 of 1086 pages 4. Click Face Sharpener. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener. 5. Click OK. The face is sharpened and the (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
Using the Face Sharpener Function The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image. Page 235 of 1086 pages (Correction/ Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area. (Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result. Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 236 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images).
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 237 of 1086 pages 4. Click Digital Face Smoothing. Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing. 5. Click OK. Skin is enhanced beautifully and the of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so Click that you can compare and check the result. Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the mark appears on the upper left of the image. Page 238 of 1086 pages (Correction/Enhancement) Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area. (Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so Click that you can compare and check the result. Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation. 6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 239 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Using the Blemish Remover Function Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 240 of 1086 pages Note Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to (Cross). 5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the image. Moles in and around the selected area are removed and the appears on the upper left of the image. (Correction/Enhancement) mark Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so Click that you can compare and check the result.
Adjusting Images Page 241 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Adjusting Images Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images. 1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click Images). (Correct/Enhance The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Adjusting Images Page 242 of 1086 pages Sharpness Blur Show-through Removal Note (Compare) to display the images before and after the adjustment side by side so that Click you can compare and check the result. Click Defaults to reset all adjustments. 5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save adjusted images as new files. Note To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All Corrected Images.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 243 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and Enhancing Photos > Correct/Enhance Images Window Correct/Enhance Images Window You can correct/enhance images in this window. To display the Correct/Enhance Images window, click (Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 244 of 1086 pages (2)Task Area Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs. Click Auto or Manual to display the corresponding tab. Auto Tab Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image. Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos. Important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting. Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG).
Correct/Enhance Images Window Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness. Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast. Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image. Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 247 of 1086 pages Red-Eye Correction Corrects red eyes in the selected area. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Note For Photo Print, red eyes are automatically corrected when printing by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox. To correct manually, deselect the checkbox.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 248 of 1086 pages Page top
Questions and Answers Page 249 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers Questions and Answers How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? How Do I Print with Even Margins? What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page top
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? Page 250 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File? If you want to move (or copy) a file created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another, you need to move (or copy) the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well.
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? Page 251 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from? As shown below, printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout/Print screen. Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates.
How Do I Print with Even Margins? Page 252 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > How Do I Print with Even Margins? How Do I Print with Even Margins? When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other, depending on the image and printer.
What Is "C1" or "C4"? Page 253 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers > What Is "C1" or "C4"? What Is "C1" or "C4"? When an album is printed, labels such as "C1" and "C4" are printed as page numbers. The "C1" and "C4" represent the front cover and back cover, respectively.
Photo Print Settings Page 254 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings Photo Print Settings Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Page top
Printing Vivid Photos Page 255 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Vivid Photos Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing. Important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo.
Reducing Photo Noise Page 256 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera, noise may appear in the image. Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Page 257 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions. Click (Crop Image) in the Layout/Print screen or double-click the preview image. Move the white frame to the portion to print and click OK.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print) Page 258 of 1086 pages Page top
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Page 259 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print) To print the date the photo was taken on the photo, click (Date Settings) in the Layout/Print screen, then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box. Note The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Page 260 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple-photo layout in the Layout/Print screen. Note See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Printing an Index Page 261 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing an Index Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos. An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page. It is convenient for managing your photos. To print an index, select Index from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen. Important Index cannot be printed if you select any of the following paper sizes.
Printing an Index Page 262 of 1086 pages Page top
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Page 263 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) You can print a variety of ID photos. Important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use. For details, contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo.
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print) To display the Preferences dialog box, click Page 264 of 1086 pages (Settings) or select Preferences... from the File menu. ID photos can only be printed on 4"x6" 10x15cm paper.
Printing Photo Information Page 265 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Printing Photo Information Printing Photo Information You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side. To print them, select Letter 8.5"x11" or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select Captured Info from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen. Note See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Saving Photos Page 266 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Saving Photos Saving Photos You can save edited photos. The information of cropping and layout can be saved. Click Save in the Layout/Print screen. When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save. Important If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
Opening Saved Files Page 267 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings > Opening Saved Files Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. 1. Click Library from Menu. The Open dialog box appears. You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows 7/ Windows Vista) or thumbnail view.
Opening Saved Files Page 268 of 1086 pages You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
Other Settings Page 269 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Page top
Changing Layout Page 270 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Changing Layout Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately. Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen, then click (Change Layout). Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK.
Changing Layout Page 271 of 1086 pages Important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout. All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page. Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Changing Background Page 272 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Changing Background Changing Background You can change the background of each page. Important You cannot change the background of the Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print. Click Background... in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen, then click (Change Background).
Changing Background Click Search backgrounds... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free. Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply. This function may not be available in some regions. Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds. When Single color Is Selected Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK.
Changing Background Page 274 of 1086 pages Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box.
Adding Photos Page 275 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding Photos Adding Photos You can add images to pages. Select the page you want to add photos in the Edit screen, then click (Add Image). Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create.
Swapping Positions of Photos Page 276 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Swapping Positions of Photos Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images. Click (Swap Image Positions) in the Edit screen. Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create.
Replacing Photos Page 277 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Replacing Photos Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image. Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen, then click (Replace Selected Image). Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the Replace Image dialog box.
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Page 278 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position, angle and size of images. Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click Image) or double-click the image.
Cropping Photos Page 279 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Cropping Photos Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions. Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click image. (Edit Image) or double-click the Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Framing Photos Page 280 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Framing Photos Framing Photos You can add frames to images. Important You cannot add frames to images in Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print. Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click image. (Edit Image) or double-click the Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Framing Photos Page 281 of 1086 pages selected page at one time. Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application. Click Search frames... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free. Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply. This function may not be available in some regions. Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing frames. Search frames...
Printing Dates on Photos Page 282 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Printing Dates on Photos Printing Dates on Photos You can print dates on images. Select the image you want to print the date in the Edit screen and click the image. (Edit Image) or double-click Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box. Select the Show date checkbox. Set the Text Orientation, Position, Font Size and Color, then click OK.
Attaching Comments to Photos Page 283 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Attaching Comments to Photos Attaching Comments to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your album. The photo name, shooting date and comments are displayed (from top to bottom) in a comment box. Important You cannot attach comments to Photo Print, Calendar, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Attaching Comments to Photos Page 284 of 1086 pages Select the Show comment box checkbox. Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display, and enter comments. Set the size and color of font, and position of the comments, etc., then click OK. Note See Help for details on comments.
Adding Text to Photos Page 285 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding Text to Photos Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos. Click (Add Text) in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text. Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create.
Saving Page 286 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Saving Saving You can save edited items. Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen. Note The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens may vary depending on what you create. When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Setting Holidays Page 287 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting Holidays Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar. (Setup Period/Holiday) in the Click Set Holidays... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or click Edit screen and click Set Holidays... in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box. To add a holiday, click Add....
Setting Holidays Page 288 of 1086 pages Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date. Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar. Note See Help for details on each dialog box.
Setting Calendar Display Page 289 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting Calendar Display Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display (fonts, lines, colors, position, size, etc.). Click Settings... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click (Setup Calendar) to display the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Opening Saved Files Page 290 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Opening Saved Files Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. 1. Click Library from Menu. The Open dialog box appears. You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows 7/ Windows Vista) or thumbnail view.
Opening Saved Files Page 291 of 1086 pages Editing Album Editing Calendar Editing Stickers Editing Layout Print Note You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from Library in Menu. - Double-click or click the file. - From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit. You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
Printing with Other Application Software Page 292 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Overview of the Printer Driver Page top
Various Printing Methods Page 293 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Borderless Printing Fit-to-Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp/Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registerin
Printing with Easy Setup Page 294 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Printing with Easy Setup Printing with Easy Setup The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this machine, is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose.
Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 295 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application.
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 296 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Default Setting Print from Last Page Collate Print from Last Page + Collate The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows: You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab.
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 297 of 1086 pages Uncheck this check box to print all pages with the same page number together. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order. Important When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give priority to the printer driver settings.
Setting the Stapling Margin Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting the Stapling Margin Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab.
Setting the Stapling Margin Page 299 of 1086 pages Note The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width. Important Staple Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when: Borderless, Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout.
Borderless Printing Page 300 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Borderless Printing Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper. Without the borderless printing function, a margin is provided around the printed data.
Borderless Printing Page 301 of 1086 pages Check the Page Size list. When you want to change, select another page size from the list. The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing. 4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider. Moving the slider to the right increases the amount extending off the paper, and moving the slider to the left decreases the amount.
Borderless Printing Page 302 of 1086 pages Page top
Fit-to-Page Printing Page 303 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Fitto-Page Printing Fit-to-Page Printing The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set fit-to-page printing Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3.
Fit-to-Page Printing Page 304 of 1086 pages 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.
Scaled Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Scaled Printing Scaled Printing The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3. Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application. 4.
Scaled Printing Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale. Important When the application software with which you created the original has the scaled printing function, configure the settings on your application software.
Scaled Printing Page 307 of 1086 pages Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
Page Layout Printing Page 308 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Page Layout Printing Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper. The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
Page Layout Printing Page 309 of 1086 pages Pages To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper, select the number of pages from the list. You can also set 2-Page Print or 4-Page Print on the Quick Setup tab. Page Order To change the page arrangement order, select an icon from the list to change the page placement order. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check this check box. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
Poster Printing Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Poster Printing Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print these pages on separate sheets of paper. When the pages are pasted together, they form a large print like a poster. The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows: Setting Poster Printing 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Poster Printing Page 311 of 1086 pages 4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box, and then click OK. Image Divisions Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases, allowing you to create a larger poster.
Poster Printing Page 312 of 1086 pages Note Click the deleted pages to display them again. Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages. 2. Complete the setup After completing the page selection, click OK. When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed. Important When Poster is selected, the Duplex Printing, Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Booklet Printing Page 313 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Booklet Printing Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
Booklet Printing Page 314 of 1086 pages Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed. Insert blank page To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank. Margin Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check the check box. 5.
Duplex Printing Page 315 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Duplex Printing Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows: You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab. 3.
Duplex Printing Page 316 of 1086 pages Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper. After one side is printed, reload the paper correctly according to the message. Then click OK to print the opposite side. Important If a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type, Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable.
Stamp/Background Printing Page 317 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing Stamp/Background Printing Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used. The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name.
Stamp/Background Printing 3. Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box, and select the stamp to be used from the list. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab. 4. Set the stamp details If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK. Define Stamp... button To change the stamp text, bitmap, or position, click this (see " Registering a Stamp ").
Stamp/Background Printing Page 319 of 1086 pages Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background. Important When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button appears grayed out and is unavailable. Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing.
Registering a Stamp Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing > Registering a Stamp Registering a Stamp This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used. You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time.
Registering a Stamp Page 321 of 1086 pages 3. Click Define Stamp... The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. 4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window Stamp tab Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type. For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color.... For Bitmap, click Select File...
Registering a Stamp Page 322 of 1086 pages Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box, and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list. 2. Click Define Stamp... The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. 3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window 4. Overwrite save the stamp Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the stamp with a different title, type a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Stamp/Background Printing > Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used. You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 324 of 1086 pages 3. Click Select Background... The Background Settings dialog box opens. 4. Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open. 5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed. When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 325 of 1086 pages title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again. The registered title appears in the Background list. Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1. Click Select Background... in the Stamp/Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens. 2.
Printing an Envelope Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Printing an Envelope Printing an Envelope If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. For details on how to load an envelope into the machine, refer to "Loading Paper" in the manual: Basic Guide. The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows: 1.
Printing an Envelope Page 327 of 1086 pages 5. Select the paper size Select Comm.Env. #10, DL Env., Youkei 4 105x235mm, or Youkei 6 98x190mm in the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, and then click OK. 6. Set the orientation To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation. 7. Select the print quality Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality. 8. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope.
Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page 328 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Displaying the Print Results before Printing Displaying the Print Results before Printing You can display and check the print result before printing. The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows: You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab. 1.
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Page 329 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such a paper size is called "custom size.
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Page 330 of 1086 pages 4. Set the custom paper size Specify Units, and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used. Then click OK. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified paper size.
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Page 331 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC P
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 332 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning method.
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Page 333 of 1086 pages 3. Setting the print quality and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level. Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK. Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color. The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones.
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 334 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows: You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 335 of 1086 pages During Grayscale Printing, color inks may be used as well as black ink.
Specifying Color Correction Page 336 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed. Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer.
Specifying Color Correction Page 337 of 1086 pages Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer. Driver Matching is the default setting for color correction. ICM/ICC Profile Matching Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing. Specify the input profile to be used. None The printer driver does not perform color correction.
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Page 338 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 339 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 340 of 1086 pages 6. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data.
Printing with ICC Profiles Page 341 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Printing with ICC Profiles Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively.
Printing with ICC Profiles Page 342 of 1086 pages Click Matching tab, and select None for Color Correction. 6. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.
Printing with ICC Profiles 3. Select the print quality For Print Quality, select High, Standard, or Fast according to your purpose. 4. Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set.... Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens. 5. Select color correction Click Matching tab, and select ICM or ICC Profile Matching for Color Correction. 6. Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data.
Printing with ICC Profiles Page 344 of 1086 pages Select Adobe RGB (1998). Important When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid. When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) is not displayed. You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. 7.
Adjusting Color Balance Page 345 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing. Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes the total color balance of the document.
Adjusting Color Balance Page 346 of 1086 pages There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger. You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
Adjusting Brightness Page 347 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing. This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors. The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed.
Adjusting Brightness Page 348 of 1086 pages 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.
Adjusting Intensity Page 349 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Intensity You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing. The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed.
Adjusting Intensity Page 350 of 1086 pages Important Adjust the slider gradually. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.
Adjusting Contrast Page 351 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing. To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct, increase the contrast.
Adjusting Contrast Page 352 of 1086 pages Important Adjust the slider gradually. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast.
Simulating an Illustration Page 353 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Simulating an Illustration Simulating an Illustration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. With the Simulate Illustration function, you can print full-color or 256-color image data so that it looks like a hand-drawn illustration.
Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 354 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Representing Image Data with a Single Color Representing Image Data with a Single Color This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. With the Monochrome Effects function, you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image.
Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 355 of 1086 pages When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Monochrome Effects appears grayed out and is unavailable.
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Page 356 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors.
Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 357 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Smoothing Jagged Outlines Smoothing Jagged Outlines This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. The Image Optimizer function reduces the jagged outlines that are produced when photos and graphics are enlarged with your application. It allows you to print smooth outlines.
Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 358 of 1086 pages Page top
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 359 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images.
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 360 of 1086 pages When you execute print, the printer corrects the photo coloring and prints out the photos. Important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when: Background is set in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab. Define Stamp... is selected in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab, and the bitmapped stamp is configured. Note Depending on images, the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect.
Reducing Photo Noise Page 361 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data > Reducing Photo Noise Reducing Photo Noise This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used. With the Photo Noise Reduction function, you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality of the digital print. The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows: 1.
Reducing Photo Noise Page 362 of 1086 pages It is recommended to select Normal for most cases. Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you. Depending on application software or resolution of image data, effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious. When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras, image may be distorted.
Overview of the Printer Driver Page 363 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations Canon IJ Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Preview Page top
Printer Driver Operations Page 364 of 1086 pages MA-6078-V1.
Canon IJ Printer Driver Page 365 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver Canon IJ Printer Driver The Canon IJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this machine. The Canon IJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand, and sends the converted data to the printer.
XPS Printer Driver Page 366 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > XPS Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver The following two printer drivers can be installed on Windows Vista SP1 or later: IJ printer driver XPS printer driver The XPS printer driver is suited to print from an application that supports XPS printing.
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 367 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows.
Maintenance Tab Page 368 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Printer Driver > Maintenance Tab Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the machine.
Canon IJ Status Monitor Page 369 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Status Monitor Canon IJ Status Monitor If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen.
Canon IJ Preview Page 370 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver > Canon IJ Preview Canon IJ Preview The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed. The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages.
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 371 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper Copying Printing from a Memory Card Printing from a USB Flash Drive Page top
Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page 372 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page top
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page 373 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper > Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper You can print a template form such as lined paper, graph paper, or check list, etc. on A4, B5, or Lettersized plain paper. Printing template forms 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper Page 374 of 1086 pages Graph paper 1: Graph 5 mm Graph paper 2: Graph 3 mm Note You cannot print Graph paper on B5 sized paper. Checklist You can print a notepad with checkboxes. Staff paper You can print staff paper with 10 or 12 staves. Staff paper 1: Staff paper 10 staves Staff paper 2: Staff paper 12 staves Handwriting paper You can print handwriting paper. Weekly schedule You can print a weekly schedule form.
Copying Page 375 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying Copying Making Copies Using Useful Copy Functions Page top
Making Copies Page 376 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies Making Copies For the basic procedure to make copies, refer to Copying. Setting Items Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Displaying the Preview Screen Using Useful Copy Functions 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Press the COPY button. 3. Load paper. 4. Load the original document on the Platen Glass or in the ADF. 5.
Making Copies Page 377 of 1086 pages Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until copying is complete. Note To change the settings, see Setting Items . When you press the center Function button, you can preview an image of the printout on the preview screen. Displaying the Preview Screen When you make copies, you can specify various layouts on the screen that appears when you press the left Function button. Using Useful Copy Functions To cancel copying, press the Stop button.
Setting Items Page 378 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies > Setting Items Setting Items When the Copy standby screen is displayed, press the right Function button to change the copy settings such as page size, media type, and print quality. Use the button to change the setting item, and the button to change the setting. Note The settings of the page size, media type, etc. are retained even if the machine is turned off.
Setting Items Page 379 of 1086 pages 4. Type Select the media type of the loaded paper. 5. Print qlty Adjust print quality according to the original. Important If you use Fast with Type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as good as expected, select Standard or High for Print qlty and try copying again. Select High for Print qlty to copy in grayscale. Grayscale renders tones in a range of grays instead of black or white. 6. Layout Select the layout.
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Page 380 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies > Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Reducing or Enlarging a Copy The LCD below is displayed when you press the right Function button in the Copy standby screen. Select the reduction/enlargement method from Magnif.. Note Some of reduction/enlargement methods are not available depending on the copy method.
Displaying the Preview Screen Page 381 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies > Displaying the Preview Screen Displaying the Preview Screen When copying the original set on the Platen Glass, pressing the center Function button in the Copy standby screen allows you to preview an image of the printout on the preview screen. Important The preview screen may not be available depending on a copy method.
Using Useful Copy Functions Page 382 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions Using Useful Copy Functions Special Copy Choose the copy method according to your purpose. Note See Settings for Special Copy for how to select the copy method. 2-on-1 copy You can copy two original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.
Settings for Special Copy Page 383 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Settings for Special Copy Settings for Special Copy 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Press the COPY button. 3. Load paper. 4. Load the original document on the Platen Glass or in the ADF. Note For details on the types and conditions of originals which you can copy, refer to Loading Paper / Originals . 5.
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy) Page 384 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy) Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy) You can copy two original pages (A) (B) onto a single sheet of paper (C) by reducing each image. Settings for Special Copy 1. Select 2-on-1 copy, then press the OK button.
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 Copy) Page 385 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 Copy) Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 Copy) You can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. For each orientation of the original document, four different layouts are available.
Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy) Page 386 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy) Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy) You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders. Settings for Special Copy 1. Select Borderless copy, then press the OK button. 2. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.
Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat) Page 387 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat) Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat) You can copy an image multiple times onto a single page. You can set the machine to automatically select the number of times it repeats the image, or you can specify the number. Settings for Special Copy 1.
Making Multiple Copies of an Entire Document (Collated Copy) Page 388 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Making Multiple Copies of an Entire Document (Collated Copy) Making Multiple Copies of an Entire Document (Collated Copy) You can obtain sorted printouts when making multiple copies of a multi-paged original. Collated copy selected. (A) Originals (B) Copy 1 (C) Copy 2 (D) Copy 3 Collated copy not selected.
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase) Page 389 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase) Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase) When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows. Using this function, you can reduce unnecessary ink consumption. Settings for Special Copy 1.
Copying on Stickers (Sticker Copy) Page 390 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying on Stickers (Sticker Copy) Copying on Stickers (Sticker Copy) You can make stickers easily with the specified layout using Canon sticker paper. Settings for Special Copy 1. Select Sticker copy, then press the OK button. 2. Confirm the instruction on the LCD, then press the OK button. 3.
Copying with Binding Margin (Binding Margin Copy) Page 391 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Copying with Binding Margin (Binding Margin Copy) Copying with Binding Margin (Binding Margin Copy) You can copy the document with a margin for hole punching or binding. Settings for Special Copy 1. Select Binding margin copy, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD.
Removing Punch Hole Marks (Punch Hole Removal Copy) Page 392 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions > Removing Punch Hole Marks (Punch Hole Removal Copy) Removing Punch Hole Marks (Punch Hole Removal Copy) When copying documents with punch holes, you can make a copy without punch hole marks. Settings for Special Copy 1. Select Punch hole removal, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD.
Printing from a Memory Card Page 393 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card Printing from a Memory Card Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card Using Useful Printing Functions Using Useful Display Functions Printing PDF File Saved on a Memory Card Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Page top
Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card Page 394 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card For the basic procedure to print from a memory card, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Setting Items Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card > Setting Items Setting Items Print Settings Confirmation Screen The LCD below is displayed when you press the right Function button in the Memory card mode. button to change the setting item, and the button to change the setting. Use the Note Depending on the functions, some setting items cannot be specified in combination.
Setting Items Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the eyes may be corrected. 7. Print date Activates/deactivates to print the shooting date on a photo. Note The shooting date is printed according to Date display format in Device user settings. For details, see Device user settings. 8. Print file no. Activates/deactivates to print the file number on a photo.
Setting Items 4. Page 397 of 1086 pages Face brightener Brightens a darkened face on the photo taken against the light. 5. Image optimizer Corrects and smoothes the jagged contours for printing. 6. Brightness Adjust brightness. 7. Contrast Adjust contrast. 8. Color balance Adjust color hue. For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone. 9. Effects Applies special effects to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or with a sketch illustration like effect.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Page 398 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card > Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Photo Index Sheet is an A4 or Letter-sized plain paper on which thumbnail images of photos saved on a memory card are printed.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet 3. Press the CARD button. 4. Insert a memory card into the Card Slot. If document files are saved on the memory card besides photo files, select Print photos in the displayed screen, then press the OK button. Important You cannot insert both the memory card and the USB flash drive at the same time. Do not remove the memory card until printing the Photo Index Sheet(s) is complete.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Page 400 of 1086 pages 11. Fill in the appropriate circles in the Photo Index Sheet. Fill in the appropriate circles ( and their print options. Good ) with a dark pencil or a black ink pen to select the photos to print Bad (a) Check mark (b) Line only (c) Too light ,. Select the page size and other printing formats. -. Select "Date"/"Auto Photo Fix OFF" as necessary. .. Fill in this circle to print a copy of all photographs.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Page 401 of 1086 pages not scan the Photo Index Sheet properly. 12. Load paper to print photos. Make sure that the page size and media type of the loaded paper match those specified on the Photo Index Sheet. Note When printing images using the Photo Index Sheet, you can select 4" x 6" (101.6 x 152.4 mm), 5" x 7" (127 x 177.8 mm), 8.5" x 11" (Letter), or A4 for the page size. 13. Make sure that Scan sheet and print is selected, then press the OK button. 14.
Using Useful Printing Functions Page 402 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions Using Useful Printing Functions Printing Memory Card Photos in Various Layouts You can select the following printing methods according to your purpose. Note For the procedure to select the printing method, see Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card Page 403 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions > Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load paper. 3. Press the CARD button. 4. Insert the memory card into the Card Slot.
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print) Page 404 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions > Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print) Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print) You can paste photos of your choice in the specified layout. Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card 1.
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print) Page 405 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions > Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print) Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print) You can print your favorite photo with a frame on Canon Photo Stickers. Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card 1. Select Sticker print, then press the OK button. 2. Confirm the instruction on the LCD, then press the OK button. 3.
Print all photos Page 406 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions > Print all photos Print all photos You can print all photos saved on a memory card. Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card 1. Select Print all photos, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD. Press the OK button to specify the setting. 3. Specify the print settings as necessary.
Photo Index print Page 407 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions > Photo Index print Photo Index print You can print an index of all the photos saved on a memory card. Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card 1. Select Photo Index print, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD. Press the OK button to specify the setting. 3.
DPOF print Page 408 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions > DPOF print DPOF print If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you can print photos according to these settings. Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card 1. Select DPOF print, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD.
Captured info print Page 409 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Printing Functions > Captured info print Captured info print You can print shooting information (Exif info) on the margin of the index of photos or selected individual photos. Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card 1. Select Captured info print, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD.
Using Useful Display Functions Page 410 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Display Functions Using Useful Display Functions Changing the Display When selecting photos to print, you can change the display or display the trimming screen by pressing the center Function button repeatedly. Thumbnail display: button, Shows nine photos at a time.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) Page 411 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful Display Functions > Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them. Note Crop images after specifying the page size, media type, and bordered or borderless printing in the print settings screen.
Printing PDF File Saved on a Memory Card Page 412 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing PDF File Saved on a Memory Card Printing PDF File Saved on a Memory Card You can print PDF files scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine or made using MP Navigator EX (application software bundled with the machine) from a memory card. Note You can print PDF files from a memory card which satisfy the following conditions.
Printing PDF File Saved on a Memory Card Page 413 of 1086 pages The PDF files made using application software other than MP Navigator EX (application software bundled with the machine) are not printable even if they are saved using MP Navigator EX. 5. Use the button to select the document to print, then press the OK button. The print setting screen is displayed. 1. Page size Select the page size. 2. Type Select Plain paper. 3. Print qlty Specify the print quality. 6.
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Page 414 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer The Card Slot of the machine can also be used as the memory card drive of the computer. Note For details on using the Card Slot over a network, see Using the Card Slot over a Network .
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer Page 415 of 1086 pages screen, confirm that the Access lamp is not flashing and remove the memory card. Over a network, the removal operation is not needed.
Printing from a USB Flash Drive Page 416 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive Printing from a USB Flash Drive Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive Using Useful Printing Functions Using Useful Display Functions Printing PDF File Saved on a USB Flash Drive Page top
Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive Page 417 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive For the basic procedure to print from a USB flash drive, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Setting Items Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive > Setting Items Setting Items Print Settings Confirmation Screen The LCD below is displayed when you press the right Function button in the Memory card mode. button to change the setting item, and the button to change the setting. Use the Note Depending on the functions, some setting items cannot be specified in combination.
Setting Items Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the eyes may be corrected. 7. Print date Activates/deactivates to print the shooting date on a photo. Note The shooting date is printed according to Date display format in Device user settings. For details, see Device user settings. 8. Print file no. Activates/deactivates to print the file number on a photo.
Setting Items 4. Page 420 of 1086 pages Face brightener Brightens a darkened face on the photo taken against the light. 5. Image optimizer Corrects and smoothes the jagged contours for printing. 6. Brightness Adjust brightness. 7. Contrast Adjust contrast. 8. Color balance Adjust color hue. For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone. 9. Effects Applies special effects to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or with a sketch illustration like effect.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Page 421 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive > Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Photo Index Sheet is an A4 or Letter-sized plain paper on which thumbnail images of photos saved on a USB flash drive are printed.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet 3. Press the CARD button. 4. Insert a USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port. If document files are saved on the USB flash drive besides photo files, select Print photos in the displayed screen, then press the OK button. Important You cannot insert both the memory card and the USB flash drive at the same time. Do not remove the USB flash drive until printing the Photo Index Sheet(s) is complete.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Page 423 of 1086 pages 11. Fill in the appropriate circles in the Photo Index Sheet. Fill in the appropriate circles ( and their print options. Good ) with a dark pencil or a black ink pen to select the photos to print Bad (a) Check mark (b) Line only (c) Too light ,. Select the page size and other printing formats. -. Select "Date"/"Auto Photo Fix OFF" as necessary. .. Fill in this circle to print a copy of all photographs.
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet Page 424 of 1086 pages not scan the Photo Index Sheet properly. 12. Load paper to print photos. Make sure that the page size and media type of the loaded paper match those specified on the Photo Index Sheet. Note When printing images using the Photo Index Sheet, you can select 4" x 6" (101.6 x 152.4 mm), 5" x 7" (127 x 177.8 mm), 8.5" x 11" (Letter), or A4 for the page size. 13. Make sure that Scan sheet and print is selected, then press the OK button. 14.
Using Useful Printing Functions Page 425 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions Using Useful Printing Functions Printing USB Flash Drive Photos in Various Layouts You can select the following printing methods according to your purpose. Note For the procedure to select the printing method, see Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive .
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive Page 426 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions > Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load paper. 3. Press the CARD button. 4. Insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port.
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print) Page 427 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions > Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print) Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print) You can paste photos of your choice in the specified layout. Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive 1.
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print) Page 428 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions > Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print) Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print) You can print your favorite photo with a frame on Canon Photo Stickers. Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive 1. Select Sticker print, then press the OK button. 2.
Print all photos Page 429 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions > Print all photos Print all photos You can print all photos saved on a USB flash drive. Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive 1. Select Print all photos, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD. Press the OK button to specify the setting. 3. Specify the print settings as necessary.
Photo Index print Page 430 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions > Photo Index print Photo Index print You can print an index of all the photos saved on a USB flash drive. Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive 1. Select Photo Index print, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD. Press the OK button to specify the setting. 3.
DPOF print Page 431 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions > DPOF print DPOF print If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you can print photos according to these settings. Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive 1. Select DPOF print, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD.
Captured info print Page 432 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Printing Functions > Captured info print Captured info print You can print shooting information (Exif info) on the margin of the index of photos or selected individual photos. Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive 1. Select Captured info print, then press the OK button. 2. Select the setting item displayed on the LCD.
Using Useful Display Functions Page 433 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Display Functions Using Useful Display Functions Changing the Display When selecting photos to print, you can change the display or display the trimming screen by pressing the center Function button repeatedly. Thumbnail display: button, Shows nine photos at a time.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) Page 434 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful Display Functions > Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them. Note Crop images after specifying the page size, media type, and bordered or borderless printing in the print settings screen.
Printing PDF File Saved on a USB Flash Drive Page 435 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Printing PDF File Saved on a USB Flash Drive Printing PDF File Saved on a USB Flash Drive You can print PDF files scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine or made using MP Navigator EX (application software bundled with the machine) from a USB flash drive.
Printing PDF File Saved on a USB Flash Drive Page 436 of 1086 pages The PDF files made using application software other than MP Navigator EX (application software bundled with the machine) are not printable even if they are saved using MP Navigator EX. 5. Use the button to select the document to print, then press the OK button. The print setting screen is displayed. 1. Page size Select the page size. 2. Type Select Plain paper. 3. Print qlty Specify the print quality. 6.
Scanning Page 437 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning Scanning Scanning Images Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanning with Other Application Software Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Other Scanning Methods Page top
Scanning Images Page 438 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images Scanning Images Scanning Images Before Scanning Placing Documents Page top
Scanning Images Page 439 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Scanning Images Scanning Images You can scan images from the machine and save them to a computer, on a memory card, or a USB flash drive easily. In addition, you can scan images with detailed settings from a computer using an application software. Select the scanning method according to your purpose.
Before Scanning Page 440 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Before Scanning Before Scanning Before scanning images, confirm the following: Does the original to be scanned meet the requirements for an original to be set on the Platen Glass or in the ADF? If you forward the data to the PC, refer to Placing Documents for details. If you save the data to the USB flash drive/memory card, refer to Loading Paper / Originals for details.
Placing Documents Page 441 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Placing Documents Placing Documents Learn how to place documents on the machine's Platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly. Important Do not place objects on the Document Cover. The objects may fall into the machine when the Document Cover is opened. This may damage the machine.
Placing Documents Page 442 of 1086 pages Important Important Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/ arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the file format. The portion within 1 mm inwards from the alignment mark cannot be scanned. Placing Multiple Documents Allow 0.
Placing Documents Page 443 of 1086 pages 2. Place the documents on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), then adjust the Paper Guides to the width of the documents. Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds. Place the documents face-up to scan both sides of the documents.
Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 444 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Mach
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Opera... Page 445 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can save scanned data on the USB flash drive or memory card using the Operation Panel.
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Opera... 6. Use the Page 446 of 1086 pages button to select the document type, then press the OK button. 7. Press the right Function button to adjust the settings as necessary. Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine 8. Load the original document on the Platen Glass or in the ADF. Note Refer to Loading Paper / Originals for how to load the original on the Platen Glass or in the ADF. 9.
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Opera... Page 447 of 1086 pages Some USB flash drives with security settings may not be used. 1. Insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port. Make sure that the USB flash drive is correctly oriented before inserting it straightforward into the Direct Print Port. Removing the USB Flash Drive 1. Make sure that the machine is not writing data to the USB flash drive. Check if the writing operation is complete on the LCD.
Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Page 448 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/ Memory Card Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory Card You can delete scanned data on the USB flash drive or memory card using the Operation Panel. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Page 449 of 1086 pages 1. Switch format Switches the display between the PDF data list and the JPEG data list. 2. Change display Switches the display between the list and the preview. 7. Select Yes on the confirmation screen, then press the OK button. The machine starts deleting the file.
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 450 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can forward scanned data to the PC using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 451 of 1086 pages Note If you select Local (USB) in the Select PC screen, the data is forwarded to the USBconnected computer. 3. Use the button to select the document type, then press the OK button. Auto scan This item is available only when the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable.
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 452 of 1086 pages the Platen Glass, then press the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & button allows you to save the scanned white scanning. After scanning is complete, pressing the documents in one PDF file on the PC. Remove the original on the Platen Glass or from the Document Output Slot after scanning is complete. 7. To specify MP Navigator EX 3.
Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-... Page 453 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-mail You can attach scanned data to an e-mail using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Attaching the Scanned Data Using the Operation Panel of the Machine to E-... Page 454 of 1086 pages connected computer. 5. Use the button to select the document type, then press the OK button. Document Scans the original on the Platen Glass or in the ADF applying the optimized settings for scanning a document. Photo Scans the original on the Platen Glass applying the optimized settings for scanning a photo. 6. Press the right Function button to adjust the settings as necessary.
Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 455 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine You can change the scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, or data format. When the Scan standby screen is displayed, press the right Function button to select the setting item.
Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 456 of 1086 pages Select the data format of the scanned data. If you save the scanned data on the USB flash drive/memory card: PDF/Compact PDF/JPEG If you forward the scanned data to the computer: PDF/Compact PDF/TIFF/JPEG If you attach the scanned data to an e-mail: PDF/Compact PDF/JPEG Note PDF cannot be selected when Photo is selected for Doc. type in one of the conditions below.
Setting Items on the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 457 of 1086 pages 8. Unsharp mask The outline of small characters or thin objects can be accentuated. Select ON if you want to accentuate the outline of the scanned data. * Not available when scanning a photo.
Appendix: Various Scan Settings Page 458 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix: Various Scan Settings Appendix: Various Scan Settings Enabling network scanning Network Scan Settings Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX Page top
Network Scan Settings Page 459 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix: Various Scan Settings > Network Scan Settings Network Scan Settings You can connect the machine to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images into a specified computer. Important Multiple users cannot scan at the same time. Note Complete the network settings of the machine beforehand. (Refer to the printed manual: Started .
Network Scan Settings For USB connection, select (model name) series for Product Name. 4. Click OK. The Preferences dialog box closes. You can now scan via a network connection. Go to the Main Menu to check whether network scanning is enabled. Setting for Scanning Using the Operation Panel You can make settings for scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. 1. Check that Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is running.
Network Scan Settings Page 461 of 1086 pages Note When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners. See " Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen " for details on Canon IJ Network Scan Utility. Note If the scanner you want to use is not displayed, check the following conditions and click OK to close the dialog box, then reopen it and select the scanner.
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navi...
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navi... Page 463 of 1086 pages Note See the section below for details. Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) 4. Click OK. The operation will be performed according to the settings when you press the Color or Black button on the machine.
Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Page 464 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software Scanning with the Bundled Application Software What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Let's Try Scanning Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX Screens Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Page top
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Page 465 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable even for beginners. Important MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer.
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)? Page 466 of 1086 pages Use the Scan/Import window to scan photos and documents, or import images saved on memory cards. View & Use Window Use the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images.
Let's Try Scanning Page 467 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning Let's Try Scanning Try scanning using MP Navigator EX. Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Scanning documents, photos, magazines, etc.
Starting MP Navigator EX Page 468 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Starting MP Navigator EX Starting MP Navigator EX Note To scan via a network connection, start MP Navigator EX and set up the network environment before scanning. Network Scan Settings Starting MP Navigator EX 1. Double-click Canon MP Navigator EX 3.1 icon on the desktop. MP Navigator EX starts.
Starting MP Navigator EX Page 469 of 1086 pages The One-click Mode screen appears. Note Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open the Navigation Mode screen at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears at startup.
Scanning Photos and Documents Page 470 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Photos and Documents Scanning Photos and Documents Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen. 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen. Starting MP Navigator EX 3. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen). 4.
Scanning Photos and Documents Page 471 of 1086 pages When you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes longer than usual. To disable the Descreen function, deselect the Descreen checkbox in the Scan Settings dialog box. Select Text(OCR) to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP Navigator EX.
Scanning Photos and Documents Page 472 of 1086 pages 7. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc. See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details. Note First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images. You can also select images by dragging and dropping them into the Selected Images area. 8.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time You can scan two or more photos (small documents) at one time by setting Document Size to Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX. Important The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time 5. Click Specify.... Select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) for Document Size. When setting is completed, click OK. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) 6. Click Scan.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Multiple documents are scanned at one time. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window. 7. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time Page 476 of 1086 pages Saving as PDF Files Note If you want to preview the images before scanning, use ScanGear.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document F... Page 477 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Place multiple documents on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) and scan at one time. 1. Place the documents on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document F... Page 478 of 1086 pages 5. Click Specify... to set the document size and scanning resolution as required. Click Orientation... to specify the orientation of the documents to be scanned. In the displayed dialog box, you can specify the Original Orientation and Binding Location. How to place the documents when scanning the back sides depends on the Binding Location. When setting is completed, click OK.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document F... Starts scanning. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When a duplex type is selected for Document Type, the Manual Duplex Scanning dialog box opens after scanning. Continue to scan the back sides of the documents. When a simplex type is selected for Document Type, the Scan Complete dialog box opens after scanning. Skip ahead to Step 9. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions to place the documents.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document F... Page 480 of 1086 pages 8. Click OK. Starts scanning. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. 9. When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end. The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window. 10. Edit the scanned images as required. Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document F...
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Page 482 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right halves of a large document separately and combine the scanned images back into one image. You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the Platen. 1.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) 4. Click Specify.... Select Stitch Assist for Document Size, then specify the scanning resolution as required. When setting is completed, click OK. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) 5. Click Scan.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) The Stitch-assist window opens. 6. Place the left half of the document face-down on the Platen. 7. Click Scan. The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch-assist window. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) 8. Place the right half of the document face-down on the Platen. 9. Click Scan. The right half of the document is scanned. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan. 10. Adjust the scanned image as required. Use the icons to swap the left and right halves, rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge/reduce the image. (Swap Left & Right) Swaps the left and right halves. Important This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Important This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced. (Enlarge) Enlarges the displayed image. (Reduce) Reduces the displayed image. (Full-screen) Enlarges/reduces the image to display it full-screen. Note Enlarge/Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image. When the document is scanned upside down, the image displayed in the Stitch-assist window will also be upside down.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist) Page 487 of 1086 pages 13. Save the scanned images.
Easy Scanning with One-click Page 488 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning with One-click Easy Scanning with One-click You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. 1. Place the document on the Platen. Placing Documents 2. Start MP Navigator EX. Starting MP Navigator EX The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One-click Mode screen appears.
Easy Scanning with One-click Page 489 of 1086 pages 4. Click the corresponding icon. Custom Scan with One-click Tab One-click Mode Screen 5. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned. 6. Set the document size and scanning resolution as required. 7. Start scanning. Starts scanning. Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Page 490 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions Useful MP Navigator EX Functions With MP Navigator EX, you can correct/enhance scanned images beautifully, and search saved images quickly.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Page 491 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct/enhance scanned images automatically. 1.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Page 492 of 1086 pages Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Make sure that Auto is selected. 5. Click Auto Photo Fix, Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing. Important Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically Page 493 of 1086 pages 6. Click OK. The entire image is corrected/enhanced automatically and upper left of the thumbnail and preview image. (Correct/Enhance) appears on the Note Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction/enhancement. Select the Apply to all images checkbox to correct/enhance all selected images. 7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images. You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Page 494 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually You can correct/enhance scanned images manually. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/ enhance.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance. 5. Click Face Brightener, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish Remover. Note The Face Brightener, Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons. Move the cursor over the image.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually The portion in and around the selected area is corrected/enhanced and appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image. Page 496 of 1086 pages (Correct/Enhance) Note You can also drag to rotate the rectangle. Click Undo to undo the latest correction/enhancement. Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image. 7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
Adjusting Images Page 497 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Adjusting Images Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
Adjusting Images Page 498 of 1086 pages Note If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear and only the preview image appears. 4. Click Manual, then click Adjust. 5. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level. When you move a slider, preview image. (Correct/Enhance) appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments.
Adjusting Images Page 499 of 1086 pages The file format of adjusted images is JPEG/Exif. 7. Click Exit. Important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Searching Images Page 500 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Searching Images Searching Images In the View & Use window of the Navigation Mode screen, you can search images saved on your computer and open them in MP Navigator EX. Opened images can be printed, edited, etc. Note Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a selected folder and its subfolders.
Searching Images Search in If you know where to look for, select the drive, folder or network from Specify Folder. File Name If you know the file name, enter it. A word or phrase in the file Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options. Important For PDF files, you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot search PDF files created or edited in other applications. Also, searching PDF files is available only when keyword search is set.
Searching Images Page 502 of 1086 pages checkbox, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched. If you select the PDF text checkbox, text in PDF files is searched. Important Text in password-protected PDF files cannot be searched. Search subfolders Select this checkbox to search subfolders. Case sensitive Select this checkbox to match case. Match all criteria Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria.
Classifying Images into Categories Page 503 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions > Classifying Images into Categories Classifying Images into Categories Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category. You can classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically, and also create custom categories. You can drag and drop an image to move it from one category to another.
Classifying Images into Categories Page 504 of 1086 pages Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others Custom categories: Displays your custom categories. To create custom categories, see " Creating Custom Categories ." Unclassified: Displays images that are not classified. Note Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically. Click Cancel to stop. Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Classifying Images into Categories Page 505 of 1086 pages View & Use Window Page top
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Page 506 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images. See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images.
Saving Page 507 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Saving Saving Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer. 1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save. 2. In the Save dialog box, specify the save settings. Specify the destination folder, file name and file type.
Saving Page 508 of 1086 pages Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder 3. Click Save. Scanned images are saved according to the settings. To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save Complete dialog box.
Saving as PDF Files Page 509 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Saving as PDF Files Saving as PDF Files Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files. 1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save as PDF file. 2. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, specify the save settings. Specify the file type, file name and destination folder.
Saving as PDF Files Page 510 of 1086 pages Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. Note PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX.
Creating/Editing PDF Files Page 511 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Creating/Editing PDF Files Creating/Editing PDF Files Create/edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to create PDF files and add/delete pages, rearrange the page order, etc. Important You can create or edit up to 99 pages at one time using MP Navigator EX.
Creating/Editing PDF Files Page 512 of 1086 pages If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password. Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files 3. Add/delete pages as required. To add an existing file, click Add Page and select the file. To delete a page, select it and click Delete Selected Pages. Note You can add PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files. When adding a password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the password. 4.
Creating/Editing PDF Files Page 513 of 1086 pages as well. 2. Click Open PDF file on the list. The application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system starts. Important Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security. Files may not open if an application that can be associated with PDF files is not installed. 3. Use the application to edit/print the file. For details, refer to the application's manual.
Printing Documents Page 514 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Printing Documents Printing Documents You can print multiple scanned images at one time, print at specific quality, etc. using MP Navigator EX. 1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images. Note See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
Printing Documents Page 515 of 1086 pages Important At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size. 4. Click Print. Starts printing. Note When printing a multiple-page PDF file via Print Document, printing may take time depending on your computer. In that case, follow these steps and change settings. Windows 7: 1. From the Start menu, select Devices and Printers. 2.
Printing Photos Page 516 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Printing Photos Printing Photos You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select how you want to print the photos. Note See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
Printing Photos Page 517 of 1086 pages 2. Click Print Photo on the list. 3. Specify print settings as required. In the displayed dialog box, specify paper size, print count, etc. Print Photo Dialog Box 4. Click Print. Starts printing. Note To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status, click printer icon on the taskbar.
Sending via E-mail Page 518 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Sending via E-mail Sending via E-mail Send scanned images via e-mail. Important MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs: - Windows Mail (Windows Vista) - Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000) - Microsoft Outlook (If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
Sending via E-mail Page 519 of 1086 pages Note You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e-mail. Click Set... to open a dialog box and select a compression type from High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression). 4. Click OK. Files are saved according to the settings, and the e-mail software program starts. 5. Specify the recipient, enter the subject and message, then send e-mail. For details, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.
Editing Files Page 520 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Editing Files Editing Files You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the images. Note See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
Editing Files Page 521 of 1086 pages Converting Documents to Text Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad (included with Windows). Important PDF files cannot be converted to text. 1. Select images and click Edit/Convert. 2. Click Convert to text file on the list. Notepad (included with Windows) starts and editable text appears. Note Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set...
Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 522 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Setting Passwords for PDF Files Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set passwords for opening, editing and printing PDF files. You can set two passwords: one for opening the file and one for editing/printing it. Important In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 523 of 1086 pages The Password Security -Settings dialog box opens. Note You can also open the Password Security -Settings dialog box by clicking Set..., then selecting Password Security for Security in the PDF Settings dialog box. 3. Select the Require a password to open the document or Use a password to restrict printing and editing of the document and its security settings checkbox, then enter a password.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files Page 524 of 1086 pages Document Open Password Permissions Password 5. Re-enter the password and click OK. The Save as PDF file dialog box returns. Important If you close the Save as PDF file dialog box without clicking Save, the settings in the Password Security -Settings dialog box will be deleted. Passwords are deleted once the file is edited. Reset the passwords when saving edited files.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Page 525 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX > Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Enter a password to open or edit/print password-protected PDF files. Password entry method varies by operation. The following procedures are examples only.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files 2. The Password dialog box opens. Enter the password and click OK. The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box. Note To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box, re-enter the password. Entering a Password (Permissions Password) to Edit or Print a File 1. In the View & Use window, select PDF files and click PDF or Print.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files Page 527 of 1086 pages 2. To create a PDF file or edit the file, select Create/Edit PDF file on the list. To print the file, click Print Document. In the Password dialog box, you will be prompted to enter a password. Note If the Document Open Password is set as well, the Document Open Password will be required, then the Permissions Password will be required. 3. Enter the password and click OK. The corresponding dialog box opens.
MP Navigator EX Screens Page 528 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens MP Navigator EX Screens Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX.
Navigation Mode Screen Page 529 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Navigation Mode Screen Navigation Mode Screen This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX. Point to the icon at the top of the screen to display each tab. Use each tab depending on what you want to do. Scan/Import You can scan photos and documents, or import images saved on memory cards.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Page 530 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan/ Import Documents or Images Tab Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan/Import Documents or Images tab. You can scan photos and documents, or import images saved on memory cards. Photos/Documents (Platen) Opens the Scan/Import window.
View Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 531 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View & Use Images on your Computer Tab View & Use Images on your Computer Tab Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View & Use Images on your Computer tab. You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine.
View Use Images on your Computer Tab Page 532 of 1086 pages Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab Page 533 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom Scan with One-click Tab Custom Scan with One-click Tab Point to One-click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One-click tab. You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. Auto Scan Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab Page 534 of 1086 pages Start scanning by clicking the button Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately. (Switch Mode) Switches to One-click Mode. The One-click Mode screen appears. One-click Mode Screen Show this window at startup Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 535 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Photos/ Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos/Documents (Platen) to open the Photos/Documents (Platen) screen (Scan/Import window). Open this window to scan documents from the Platen.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 536 of 1086 pages Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR) Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color) Important You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. Specify... Specify the document size, resolution, and other advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Important Specify...
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Opens this guide. Edit Tools (Select All) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. (Rotate Left) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Rotate Right) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise. (Invert) Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally. (Trimming) Trims the target image (outlined in orange).
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 538 of 1086 pages Selected Images Area (Cancel All) Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area. (Cancel Selection) Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area. Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings. Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Page 540 of 1086 pages Resolution Note The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text(OCR). 300 dpi / 400 dpi Auto Photo Fix / Auto Document Fix The displayed item varies by Document Type. Auto Photo Fix This is displayed when Document Type is Color Photo. Select this checkbox to automatically analyze the captured scene (landscape, night scene, etc.) and apply suitable corrections.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Page 541 of 1086 pages Reduce Show-through Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers. Important You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or Text(OCR). Note Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the scanned image.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents) Page 542 of 1086 pages Defaults Restores the default settings.
Stack of Documents (ADF) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 543 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Stack of Documents (ADF) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Stack of Documents (ADF) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Stack of Documents (ADF), or click Stack of Documents (ADF) in the Scan/Import window to open the Stack of Documents (ADF) screen (Scan/Import window).
Stack of Documents (ADF) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 544 of 1086 pages Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. When scanning one side of each document: Color Document(Simplex), B/W Document(Simplex) or Text(Simplex) When scanning both sides of each document: Color Document(Duplex), B/W Document(Duplex) or Text(Duplex) Important You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. Specify...
Stack of Documents (ADF) Screen (Scan/Import Window) to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Edit Tools (Select All) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window. (Rotate Left) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Rotate Right) Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise.
Stack of Documents (ADF) Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 546 of 1086 pages Note When you click Close All, the button changes to Open All. Selected Images Area (Cancel All) Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area. (Cancel Selection) Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area. Selected Images Area Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Stack of Documents (ADF)) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan Settings Dialog Box (Stack of Documents (ADF)) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Stack of Documents (ADF)) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings. Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Stack of Documents (ADF)) Page 548 of 1086 pages Important Binding Location cannot be specified when a simplex type such as Color Document(Simplex) is selected for Document Type. Scanning Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Note The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text(Simplex) or Text(Duplex).
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Stack of Documents (ADF)) Page 549 of 1086 pages The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly.
Save Dialog Box Page 550 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save Dialog Box Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan/Import window. In the Save dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one. The following folders are specified by default.
Save Dialog Box Page 551 of 1086 pages selected on the " General Tab" of the Preferences dialog box. Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 552 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as PDF file Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF files. You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP Navigator EX.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 553 of 1086 pages PDF Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file. PDF(Multiple Pages) Save multiple images in one PDF file. Note PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected. PDF(Add Page) Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added. Important Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX.
PDF Settings Dialog Box Page 554 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF Settings Dialog Box PDF Settings Dialog Box In the PDF Settings dialog box, you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files. Enable keyword search Select this checkbox to convert characters in a document to text data. This will enable an easy search by keyword.
PDF Settings Dialog Box Page 555 of 1086 pages Standard It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server. Important This function is not available when scanning by selecting PDF on the Operation Panel of the machine. Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high compression. Important Compression type cannot be set when Color Mode is Black and White.
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 556 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Memory Card, or click Memory Card in the Scan/Import window to open the Memory Card screen (Scan/Import window).
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Import Imports the selected images and open them in the View & Use window. View & Use Window Jump to Main Menu Jumps to the Main Menu. Toolbar Preferences The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions. Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Edit Tools (Select All) Selects all images in the Thumbnail window. (Cancel All) Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) Page 558 of 1086 pages Related Topic Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page top
View Use Window Page 559 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View & Use Window View & Use Window Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View & Use window. Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer. Important For PDF files, only those created with MP Navigator EX are displayed.
View Use Window Page 560 of 1086 pages Displays folders of images (grouped by year, year/month and year/month/date) in My Box in tree view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right. Image date is the scanned, captured or updated date. Specify Folder Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view. Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail window to the right. Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name, allowing you to rename it.
View Use Window Page 561 of 1086 pages (Image Correction/Enhancement) Allows you to correct the target image (outlined in orange). Click this button to open the Correct/ Enhance Images window in which you can correct/enhance images and also adjust the brightness, contrast, etc. Correct/Enhance Images Window Important Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files. Zoom in Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange).
View Use Window Page 562 of 1086 pages Note A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set. Thumbnails may appear as "?" in the following cases. - Opening unsupported images - File size is too large and there is not enough memory to display the image - The file is corrupted When Images are Sorted by Categories Scanned images are displayed by category. Note Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories.
View Use Window Page 563 of 1086 pages Displays all categories and images. Specific Categories Displays categories containing images, along with the contained images. More images will be displayed in the Thumbnail window, allowing you to find or move images easily. Note Immediately after opening the View & Use window, categories containing images appear along with the contained images, and All Categories is displayed. Click All Categories, to changes to Specific Categories.
Create/Edit PDF file Window Page 564 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Create/ Edit PDF file Window Create/Edit PDF file Window Click PDF in the View & Use window, then click Create/Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create/Edit PDF file window. In the Create/Edit PDF file window, you can add/delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files created with MP Navigator EX.
Create/Edit PDF file Window Page 565 of 1086 pages Add Page Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file. Note A password will be required to add a password-protected PDF file. Undo Cancels the latest change made. Reset Cancels all the changes made. Save Selected Pages Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. Only the selected page is saved. Note When multiple pages are selected, a multiple-page PDF file is created.
Create/Edit PDF file Window Page 566 of 1086 pages (Full-screen) Enlarges/reduces the image to display it fully in Preview. (Thumbnail Mode) Switches to Thumbnail Mode. The pages are displayed in thumbnail view.
Print Document Dialog Box Page 567 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print Document Dialog Box Print Document Dialog Box Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document dialog box. In the Print Document dialog box, you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images at one time. Printer Select the printer to use. Paper Source Select paper source.
Print Document Dialog Box Page 568 of 1086 pages Auto Scale is adjusted automatically according to the detected paper width and the selected paper size. Image may be printed rotated 90 degrees depending on its size. Scale Select a scale from the list. Important At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size. Paper Size Select the size of paper for printing.
Print Photo Dialog Box Page 569 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print Photo Dialog Box Print Photo Dialog Box Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box. Important The Print Photo dialog box will not open if Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts instead. PDF files cannot be printed.
Print Photo Dialog Box Page 570 of 1086 pages Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins. Important Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing. This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing. Orientation Specify the print orientation. Important This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing.
Send via E-mail Dialog Box Page 571 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Send via E-mail Dialog Box Send via E-mail Dialog Box Click Send in the View & Use window, then click Attach to E-mail on the list to open the Send via E-mail dialog box. In the Send via E-mail dialog box, you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e-mail.
Send via E-mail Dialog Box Page 572 of 1086 pages Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 573 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Correct/ Enhance Images Window Correct/Enhance Images Window Click (Image Correction/Enhancement) in the View & Use window or click Fix photo images in Image Handling Buttons to open the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos. Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting. Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Face Sharpener Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 575 of 1086 pages See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually " for details. Adjustment Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness. Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast. Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Face Brightener Corrects the entire image to brighten the facial area in and around the selected area. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Face Sharpener Corrects the entire image to sharpen the facial area in and around the selected area. You can adjust the effect level using the slider. Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles in the selected area. You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Correct/Enhance Images Window Page 577 of 1086 pages Inverts the image horizontally. (Trimming) Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. In the displayed window, drag the white frame to specify the trimming area. Move the cursor inside the white frame and drag to move the trimming area. Note Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a balanced image. (Enlarge) Enlarges the displayed image.
One-click Mode Screen Page 578 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > One-click Mode Screen One-click Mode Screen Click (Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One-click Mode screen. You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon. Auto Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set.
One-click Mode Screen Page 579 of 1086 pages Preferences Dialog Box (Guide) Opens this guide. Important The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or Custom dialog box. When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not select Auto Mode).
Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 580 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto Scan Dialog Box Auto Scan Dialog Box Click Auto Scan on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Auto in the One-click Mode screen to open the Auto Scan dialog box. Supported Documents Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD. Important The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly.
Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 581 of 1086 pages When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only. Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected. The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. Save Settings File name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits are appended to each file name.
Auto Scan Dialog Box Page 582 of 1086 pages Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 583 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Save in the One-click Mode screen to open the Save dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 584 of 1086 pages documents of the same size even if Auto Mode is set. Note To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 585 of 1086 pages See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents. Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the file format. Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 586 of 1086 pages Note You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected. When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in a dialog box of the One-click Mode screen. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings. Note The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 588 of 1086 pages Important When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Orientation... Set the orientation and stapling side of the documents to scan from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 589 of 1086 pages checkbox and scan. Descreen Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns. Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Page 590 of 1086 pages You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist. This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported. The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be detected correctly.
Save Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save Dialog Box Save Dialog Box The Save dialog box opens when you scan from the Save or Custom dialog box of the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information). You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails. Save as type Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Save Dialog Box Page 592 of 1086 pages Important PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) and PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned from the Custom dialog box. You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Set... When Save as type is JPEG/Exif You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression).
Save Dialog Box Page 593 of 1086 pages Page top
Exif Settings Dialog Box Page 594 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Exif Settings Dialog Box Exif Settings Dialog Box You can input Exif information into a file to be saved. Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Embedding Exif information into scanned images allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images.
PDF Dialog Box Page 595 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF Dialog Box PDF Dialog Box Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click PDF in the One-click Mode screen to open the PDF dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned.
PDF Dialog Box Page 596 of 1086 pages document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen. Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Save Settings Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
PDF Dialog Box Page 597 of 1086 pages Open the save dialog box after scanning the image Select this to open the Save as PDF file dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder and file name. Save as PDF file Dialog Box Note To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. After scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 598 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as PDF file Dialog Box Save as PDF file Dialog Box The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from the PDF dialog box of the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box Page 599 of 1086 pages machine. If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords. Setting Passwords for PDF Files Set... Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details. Password security settings Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Mail Dialog Box Page 600 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Mail Dialog Box Mail Dialog Box Click Attach to E-mail on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Mail in the One-click Mode screen to open the Mail dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned.
Mail Dialog Box Page 601 of 1086 pages Resolution Select the resolution at which to scan documents. Resolution Use the scanner driver Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen. Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Mail Dialog Box Page 602 of 1086 pages Attachment Settings Mail Program Specify an e-mail software program. Note Select Add... to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e-mail software program. If the e-mail software program you want to use is not listed, click Add to List and select it. Start scanning by clicking the one-click button Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon in One-click Mode. Apply Saves and applies the specified settings.
OCR Dialog Box Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > OCR Dialog Box OCR Dialog Box Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the OCR dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned.
OCR Dialog Box Page 604 of 1086 pages settings. Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear screen. Specify... Opens the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings. Scan Settings Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen) Note When scanning slanted documents, select the Correct slanted document checkbox to improve the text recognition accuracy.
OCR Dialog Box Page 605 of 1086 pages according to the language of the document to be scanned. When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file. General Tab Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
Custom Dialog Box Page 606 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom Dialog Box Custom Dialog Box Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the Custom dialog box. Scan Settings Document Type Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is automatically detected.
Custom Dialog Box Page 607 of 1086 pages When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place documents of the same size even if Auto Mode is set. Note To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine. Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Document Size Select the size of the document to be scanned. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Custom Dialog Box Page 608 of 1086 pages You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type. Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF You can change the file format from Set.... Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an option other than Auto in Save as type.
Custom Dialog Box Page 609 of 1086 pages Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such as destination folder, file name and Exif information. Save Dialog Box Application Settings Open with Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images are scanned.
Preferences Dialog Box Page 610 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Preferences Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions via the General and Scanner Button Settings tabs. Note See the corresponding sections below for details on each tab.
General Tab Page 611 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > General Tab General Tab On the General tab, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings. Product Name Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use. If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
General Tab Page 612 of 1086 pages - Black and White cannot be selected in the color mode settings for One-click Mode. - Remove gutter shadow is not available. - Auto Photo Fix and Auto Document Fix are not available. - Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB for One-click Mode is not available.
General Tab Page 613 of 1086 pages Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. Only text written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to Notepad. Combine multiple text conversion results When scanning multiple documents, select the checkbox to collect the conversion results (text) into one file. When the checkbox is selected, you can scan up to 99 pages at one time.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Page 614 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. This section describes the settings available when Select Event is Save to PC.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Page 615 of 1086 pages Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Save Settings Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them. The File Name and Save in settings will be displayed. Important If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files. File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters).
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save to PC) Page 616 of 1086 pages PDF You can make advanced settings for creating PDF files when PDF is selected on the Operation Panel of the machine. Click Set... to open a dialog box and specify the save settings for PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box" for details. Important Use the Operation Panel of the machine to set the compression type for saving. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse...
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Page 617 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine. This section describes the settings available when Select Event is Attach to E-mail.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Page 618 of 1086 pages Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Save Settings File Size Not available. File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). Save as type Set this item using the Operation Panel of the machine. Set... Opens the Auto Save Settings dialog box in which you can specify the file format and other advanced save settings. Data Type for Auto Scan Not available.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail) Page 619 of 1086 pages Save to a Subfolder with Current Date Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2010_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be created. If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Attachment Settings Mail Program Specify an e-mail software program.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... on the Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Page 621 of 1086 pages When this checkbox is selected, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only. Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected. This function is not available when scanning by pressing the Black button with Auto Scan selected on the Operation Panel of the machine. The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Scanner Button Settings) Page 622 of 1086 pages - Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points - Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text - Documents with patterned backgrounds Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images. Document Language Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Page 623 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page 624 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images > Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card You can import images (including PDF files created via scanning using the Operation Panel) saved on a memory card, and save them to a computer or print them using MP Navigator EX.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page 625 of 1086 pages Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select the Always do this for pictures checkbox and click MP Navigator EX Ver3.1. Windows XP: Select MP Navigator EX Ver3.1, then select the Always do the selected action. checkbox and click OK. The Memory Card screen of the Scan/Import window appears, and the images and PDF files saved on the memory card appear in the Thumbnail window.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page 626 of 1086 pages Note With network connection, the Map Network Drive dialog box may open when a memory card is inserted into the machine for the first time. Specify a drive letter to map. 3. Select the checkboxes of the images and PDF files you want to import, then click Import. The Import dialog box opens. Specify the folder in which to save the imported files. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the imported images and PDF files.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card Page 627 of 1086 pages See the corresponding sections below for details on using the imported images and PDF files.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 628 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images > Opening Images Saved on a Computer Opening Images Saved on a Computer You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail using MP Navigator EX. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine. 1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Opening Images Saved on a Computer Page 629 of 1086 pages 4. Select the images you want to use, then select what you want to do with them. See the corresponding sections below for details on using images.
Scanning with Other Application Software Page 630 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software Scanning with Other Application Software What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Page top
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Page 631 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the output size and make image corrections when scanning. ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN.
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Page 632 of 1086 pages Auto Scan Mode Use Auto Scan Mode to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) and clicking Scan.
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 633 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Starting ScanGear (scanner driver) Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning documents after making simple image corrections Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and brightne
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. ScanGear can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application. Note To scan via a network connection, start ScanGear and set up the network environment before scanning.
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 635 of 1086 pages 2. Click the corresponding icon. The corresponding dialog box opens. 3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox in Scan Settings, then click Scan. The ScanGear screen appears. Important Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the PDF dialog box or Auto Scan dialog box. Starting from an Application Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear from an application. The procedure varies depending on the application.
Scanning in Basic Mode Page 636 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Basic Mode In Basic Mode, you can scan easily by following the on-screen steps. This section explains how to scan a single document from the Platen or documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Scanning in Basic Mode Page 637 of 1086 pages Important Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). For details, refer to the application's manual. Note To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine(Color). 3. Click Preview. Preview image appears in the Preview area. Important Preview is not displayed when an ADF type is selected for Select Source. Note Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source. 4.
Scanning in Basic Mode Page 638 of 1086 pages Skip ahead to Step 8 when an ADF type is selected for Select Source. 5. Set Output Size. Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination. 6. Adjust the scan area (cropping frame) as required. Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image. Adjusting Cropping Frames 7. Set Image corrections as required. 8. Click Scan. Starts scanning.
Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 639 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode In Advanced Mode, you can specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning. This section explains how to scan a single document from the Platen.
Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 640 of 1086 pages Note Settings are not retained when you switch between modes. 3. Set Input Settings. Input Settings 4. Click Preview. Preview images appear in the Preview area. Note If you scan without preview, the show-through reduction function will be active. This function is useful when scanning magazines. However, when scanning photos, the color tone of the scanned image may differ from the source due to the show-through reduction function.
Scanning in Advanced Mode Page 641 of 1086 pages Advanced Mode Tab Page top
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 642 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Scanning in Auto Scan Mode You can scan easily in Auto Scan Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver) by letting it automatically determine the type of documents placed on the Platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode Page 643 of 1086 pages on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Adv... Page 644 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode In Advanced Mode, you can specify the image brightness, color tone, etc.
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Adv... Page 645 of 1086 pages Starts scanning. Note Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings (document type, etc.). ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 646 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time in Basic Mode and Advanced Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver)
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 647 of 1086 pages 3. Click Preview. Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Images are cropped (scan areas are specified) automatically according to the document size. 4. Set Destination. 5. Set Output Size. 6. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames) and set Image corrections as required. Note You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 648 of 1086 pages 8. Click Scan. Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan multiple documents as a single image. Note Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view. 1. After previewing images, click (Thumbnail) on the Toolbar. Switch to whole image view.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 649 of 1086 pages Note ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Page 650 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) The following sections provide you with tips and know-how on advanced scanning techniques involving color/brightness adjustment, etc.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Corr... Page 651 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.) Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Corr... Page 652 of 1086 pages Reducing show-through in text documents or lightening the base color in recycled paper, newspapers, etc. when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Set Reduce Show-through to Low or High according to the degree of show-through or darkness of the base color. None Low Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images Set Unsharp Mask to ON. OFF ON Reducing gradations and stripe patterns Set Descreen to ON.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Corr... Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast. None Medium Reducing graininess Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of graininess. None Medium Correcting backlit images Set Backlight Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of backlight.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 654 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the Color Pattern function in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Basic Mode tab. Color Adjustment Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Page 655 of 1086 pages It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so that the portion turns white. Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them. Below is an example of correcting a bluish image. Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Page 656 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Saturation/Color Balance). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Saturation Adjust the image's saturation (vividness).
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Move Page 657 of 1086 pages (Slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color. Cyan & Red Magenta & Green Yellow & Blue These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color. It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 658 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting Brightness and Contrast In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Brightness/Contrast). Note Click (Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click (Up arrow) to return to the previous view.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Page 659 of 1086 pages Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale. Brightness Adjust the image brightness. Move (Slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Darkened Original image Brightened Note Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken the image too much.
Adjusting Histogram Page 660 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Histogram Adjusting Histogram In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Histogram). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation).
Adjusting Histogram Page 661 of 1086 pages (1) Bright area (2) Dark area (3) Whole image More data is distributed to the highlight side. More data is distributed to the Data is widely distributed between the highlight and shadow. shadow side. Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider) Select a Channel, then move set as the shadow or highlight.
Adjusting Histogram Page 662 of 1086 pages Moving the Mid-point Slider Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range. Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side. Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Tone Curve Page 663 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Tone Curve Adjusting Tone Curve In ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab, click (Tone Curve Settings). Note Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation).
Adjusting Tone Curve Page 664 of 1086 pages Adjusting Tone Curve In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image and Edit custom curve. No correction (No adjustment) Overexposure (Convex curve) The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a bright-toned image when viewed on a monitor.
Adjusting Tone Curve Page 665 of 1086 pages Edit custom curve You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas.
Setting Threshold Page 666 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Setting Threshold Setting Threshold The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is the borderline value that determines a color as black or white.
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens Page 667 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens The following sections describe ScanGear (scanner driver)'s screens and functions, and how to use ScanGear.
Basic Mode Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Basic Mode Tab Basic Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps. This section describes the settings and functions available in Basic Mode. When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), documents are scanned without preview. Also, the paper size is set to A4.
Basic Mode Tab Page 669 of 1086 pages Scan documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in black and white. Important Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). For details, refer to the application's manual. Note When you select a document type, the Unsharp Mask function will be active. When you select an option other than the ADF types, colors are adjusted based on the document type. If you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be active.
Basic Mode Tab Page 670 of 1086 pages displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each frame is scanned individually. In whole image view When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Paper Size (L, A4, etc.) Select an output paper size.
Basic Mode Tab Page 671 of 1086 pages You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area. If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned. Adjusting Cropping Frames Image corrections Fading correction Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. Backlight correction Corrects photos that have been shot against light.
Basic Mode Tab Page 672 of 1086 pages (Rotate Right) Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise. - The result will be reflected in the scanned image. - The image returns to its original state when you preview again. (Auto Crop) Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame.
Basic Mode Tab Page 673 of 1086 pages Note When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status. - Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied. - Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. - Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
Basic Mode Tab Page 674 of 1086 pages Page top
Advanced Mode Tab Page 675 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Advanced Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness and color tone. This section describes the settings and functions available in Advanced Mode. When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), documents are scanned without preview.
Advanced Mode Tab Page 676 of 1086 pages Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Favorite Settings List. When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with the predefined items. To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save settings displayed in Favorite Settings List. Note You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview. Save up to 10 items.
Advanced Mode Tab Preview Performs a trial scan. Scan Scanning starts. Note When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open. Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in " Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box). It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size.
Advanced Mode Tab (Thumbnail)/ Page 678 of 1086 pages (Whole Image) Switches the view in the Preview area. Preview Area (Clear) Click this button to delete the preview image. It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings. (Crop) Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse. (Move Image) If an enlarged image is too large to fit in the Preview area, you can click this button and drag the image across the screen until the part you want to see is displayed.
Advanced Mode Tab Page 679 of 1086 pages (Information) Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.). (Open Guide) This page appears. Preview Area Preview Area This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons .
Advanced Mode Tab Page 680 of 1086 pages Note You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.
Input Settings Page 681 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Input Settings Input Settings Input Settings allows you to set the following items: Select Source The type of document to be scanned is displayed. To scan from the Platen, select Platen. To scan from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), select Document (ADF Simplex).
Input Settings Page 682 of 1086 pages Important The Orientation dialog box can only be opened when Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex). Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Color Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue). Grayscale Select this mode to scan black and white photos, or to create black and white images. This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Output Settings Page 683 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Output Settings Output Settings Output Settings allows you to set the following items: Output Resolution Select the resolution to scan at. The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image. Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value in 1 dpi increments.
Output Settings Page 684 of 1086 pages When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Note (Width) and To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into (Height) in Output Settings or specify a value (by 1%) for %. The maximum value available for % depends on the Output Resolution. % can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum available output resolution).
Output Settings Page 685 of 1086 pages Data Size An image file is created when the preview image is scanned. Its size when saved in BMP format is displayed. Note When the file size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Image Settings Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Image Settings Image Settings Important Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color tone may be adversely affected. Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image. Note Selectable settings depend on color mode settings. Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings.
Image Settings Page 687 of 1086 pages Newspaper Applies Image Adjustment suitable for newspapers. Document Applies Image Adjustment suitable for text documents. Important You can set Image Adjustment after preview. You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type. The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment.
Image Settings Page 688 of 1086 pages This function may not be effective for some types of photos. Note It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials. Fading Correction Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. None Fading correction will not be applied.
Image Settings Important You can set Backlight Correction after preview. You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small. Note Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied. Applying Grain Correction and setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns.
Image Settings Page 690 of 1086 pages Note Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen. If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame on the preview image.
Color Adjustment Buttons Page 691 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color Adjustment Buttons Color Adjustment Buttons The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones. You can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Color Adjustment Buttons Page 692 of 1086 pages (Histogram) A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can specify the darkest level (shadow) and brightest level (highlight) within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image. Adjusting Histogram (Tone Curve Settings) Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of tone input and output.
Color Adjustment Buttons Page 693 of 1086 pages Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List. Click Save to save. You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu. To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.
Auto Scan Mode Tab Page 694 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Auto Scan Mode Tab Auto Scan Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) and clicking a button. In Auto Scan Mode, documents are automatically detected. You do not need to specify cropping frames or make image corrections.
Auto Scan Mode Tab Page 695 of 1086 pages "Placing Documents " appears. Execute recommended image correction Select this checkbox to apply suitable corrections automatically based on the document type. Important When this checkbox is selected in ScanGear (scanner driver) started from MP Navigator EX, the files can be saved in JPEG/Exif or PDF format only. Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
Preferences Dialog Box Page 696 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Preferences Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box Click Preferences... in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen to open Preferences dialog box. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear functions via the Scanner, Preview, Scan and Color Settings tabs.
Scanner Tab Page 697 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scanner Tab Scanner Tab On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings. Quiet Mode Select this checkbox to reduce scanner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or scanning documents. Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Preview Tab Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Preview Tab Preview Tab On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings. Preview at Start of ScanGear Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started. Automatically Execute Preview ScanGear will automatically start previewing at startup. Display Saved Preview Image The previously previewed image will be displayed.
Preview Tab Page 699 of 1086 pages Cropping Size for Thumbnail View Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents. Larger Displays 105% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size. Standard The standard size. Smaller Displays 95% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size. Note When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be refreshed and cropped to the new size.
Scan Tab Page 700 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scan Tab Scan Tab On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings. Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images. Close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed.
Color Settings Tab Page 701 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color Settings Tab Color Settings Tab On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings. Color Adjustment Select either of the following. You can select one when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale. Recommended Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
Color Settings Tab Page 702 of 1086 pages monitor. Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20). Note Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual, contact the manufacturer.
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Page 703 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting the cropping frame (scan area) Adjusting Cropping Frames Selecting the best resolution Resolution Learning about file formats File Formats Learning about Color Matching Color Matching Matching the colors between the document and monitor See Monitor Gamma in the following secti
Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 704 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > Adjusting Cropping Frames Adjusting Cropping Frames You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area of the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. When you click Scan, only the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned and passed to the application.
Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 705 of 1086 pages (Crosshair arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click The cursor will change into and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame. Note In Advanced Mode, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into (Width) (Height) in Input Settings. and Input Settings (Switch Aspect Ratio). However, You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking (Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible.
Adjusting Cropping Frames Page 706 of 1086 pages You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame. You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear, the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames. When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.
Resolution Page 707 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > Resolution Resolution What is Resolution? The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per inch (2.
Resolution Page 708 of 1086 pages Setting the Resolution in ScanGear (Scanner Driver) In ScanGear, you can specify the resolution with Output Resolution in Output Settings on the Advanced Mode tab. Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale The scanning resolution is automatically set so that the value set in Output Resolution will be the resolution of the scanned image.
Resolution Page 709 of 1086 pages slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory. Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image.
File Formats Page 710 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > File Formats File Formats You can select a file format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable format according to how you want to use the image on which application. Available file formats vary by application and computer (Windows or Macintosh). See below for the characteristics of each image file format.
Color Matching Page 711 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning > Color Matching Color Matching Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor or a printed image with the colors of the original document.
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Page 712 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Page top
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Page 713 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Set up Canon IJ Network Scan Utility to scan images into a computer over a network using the Operation Panel of the machine. After installation, Canon IJ Network Scan Utility appears in the notification area of the taskbar.
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen Page 714 of 1086 pages Select the product you want to use. Scanners that are registered to the system are displayed. Select the checkbox of the product you want to use. You can select up to three scanners. Click Instructions to open this page. Note If the scanner you want to use is not displayed, check the following conditions and click OK to close the dialog box, then reopen it and select the scanner.
Other Scanning Methods Page 715 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Page top
Scanning with WIA Driver Page 716 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning with WIA Driver You can scan an image from a WIA-compliant application and use the image in that application. Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later. It allows you to scan documents without using an application. Scan documents from a TWAIN-compliant application to specify advanced settings for scanning.
Scanning with WIA Driver Page 717 of 1086 pages The currently set product name is displayed. To change the scanner, click Change... and select the product you want to use. Profile Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the document to be scanned. To save a new Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box. Source Select a scanner type. To scan from the Platen, select Flatbed.
Scanning with WIA Driver scanner or camera from application.) Page 718 of 1086 pages .) (Select the command to scan a document in the 3. Select an image type according to the document to be scanned. To scan from the Platen, select Flatbed for Paper source. To scan from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), select Document Feeder. Note To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select Custom Settings.
Scanning with WIA Driver Page 719 of 1086 pages With network connection, you cannot specify Brightness and Contrast. 5. Click Preview to preview the image. The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area. Important With network connection, scan without preview when scanning documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). If you preview, place the document again and scan.
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Page 720 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver. Important With network connection, you cannot scan using the WIA driver. 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. 2.
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) Page 721 of 1086 pages Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image, thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Faxing Page 722 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing Faxing Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Sending Faxes from a Computer Page top
Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Page 723 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Sending Faxes Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Sending a Fax Using the Speed Dialing Feature Searching a Registered Dial Code Number by Name (Directory Dialing) Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Seq
Sending Faxes Page 724 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Sending Faxes Sending Faxes For the preparations required to send faxes, or the basic procedure for sending faxes using the Numeric buttons, refer to Sending Faxes.
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone Page 725 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone If you want to speak to the recipient before sending a fax, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive faxes automatically, send a fax manually after speaking to the recipient on the telephone.
Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Page 726 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Speed dialing allows you to dial fax/telephone numbers by simply pressing a few buttons.
Registering Coded Speed Dial Numbers Page 727 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing > Registering Coded Speed Dial Numbers Registering Coded Speed Dial Numbers Before you can use the coded speed dialing feature, you need to register the recipients' numbers. The LCD may differ depending on the machine you are using. The LCDs of MX870 series are used for explanation.
Registering Coded Speed Dial Numbers 5. Use the Page 728 of 1086 pages button to select Name, then press the OK button. 6. Use the Numeric buttons to enter a name for the coded speed dial code (max. 16 characters, including spaces), then press the OK or the button. Note For details on how to enter or delete characters or numbers, refer to Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing. 7. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number (max.
Registering Coded Speed Dial Numbers Page 729 of 1086 pages Page top
Registering Group Dial Numbers Page 730 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing > Registering Group Dial Numbers Registering Group Dial Numbers To send the same document to several recipients successively, select the numbers you registered to the speed dial codes and register them to a group dial. The LCD may differ depending on the machine you are using.
Registering Group Dial Numbers Page 731 of 1086 pages To register a group under a one-touch speed dial code (MX870 series): button to select an unoccupied one-touch speed dial code (01 to 03), then press Use the the OK button. To register a group under a coded speed dial code: Use the Numeric buttons or the button to select an unoccupied speed dial code (00 to 99 for MX870 series, 00 to 19 for MX350 series), then press the OK button.
Changing Registered Information Page 732 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing > Changing Registered Information Changing Registered Information To change information registered for speed dialing, follow the procedure below. Note You can change registered information using Speed Dial Utility. For details, see Changing Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility . 1.
Changing Registered Information Page 733 of 1086 pages on the code is overwritten. 7. Press the OK button to finalize registration.
Deleting Registered Information Page 734 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing > Deleting Registered Information Deleting Registered Information To delete information registered for speed dialing, follow the procedure below. Note You can delete registered information using Speed Dial Utility. For details, see Deleting Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility . 1.
Printing a List of the Registered Destinations Page 735 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing > Printing a List of the Registered Destinations Printing a List of the Registered Destinations You can print a list of the recipients registered for speed dialing and can keep it near the machine to refer to when dialing. 1. Load paper. Refer to Loading Paper / Originals . 2.
Sending a Fax Using the Speed Dialing Feature Page 736 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Sending a Fax Using the Speed Dialing Feature Sending a Fax Using the Speed Dialing Feature Registering fax or telephone numbers for speed dialing enables you to send faxes easily. Note For the preparations required to send faxes, or the basic procedure for sending faxes using the Numeric buttons, refer to Sending Faxes .
Searching a Registered Dial Code Number by Name (Directory Dialing) Page 737 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Searching a Registered Dial Code Number by Name (Directory Dialing) Searching a Registered Dial Code Number by Name (Directory Dialing) You can search the fax/telephone numbers registered to the speed dial codes in alphabetical order.
Searching a Registered Dial Code Number by Name (Directory Dialing) Page 738 of 1086 pages transmission. Important Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting) Page 739 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting) Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting) This machine allows you to prepare for sending the same document to multiple recipients (max. 104 recipients for MX870 series, 21 for MX350 series) in one operation.
Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting) Page 740 of 1086 pages button. To review the numbers you have entered, use the Pressing the Back button allows you to delete the recipient's number you entered last. 2. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission. Important Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing. Note To cancel sequential broadcasting, press the Stop button.
Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number) Page 741 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number) Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number) There are two methods of redialing: Automatic redialing and Manual redialing. Automatic Redialing Manual Redialing Important It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect registration of fax/telephone numbers.
Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number) Page 742 of 1086 pages One-Touch Speed Dial (MX870 series), Coded Dial , or Redial/Pause button. To cancel manual redialing, press the Stop button.
Using the Hook Button Page 743 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using the Hook Button Using the Hook Button Follow the procedure below to send faxes using the Hook button. Note You can use the Hook button only when Hook key setting is set to Enable. For details, see Hook key setting . Important It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect registration of fax/telephone numbers.
Using the Useful Transmission Functions Page 744 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using the Useful Transmission Functions Using the Useful Transmission Functions Using the Information Services Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes For sending faxes from your computer, refer to Sending Faxes from a Computer .
Using the Information Services Page 745 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using the Information Services Using the Information Services You can use various information services such as provided by banks, and make airline reservations or hotel reservations. Since these services require tone dialing to use their services, you need to temporarily switch to tone dialing if your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line.
Using the Information Services Page 746 of 1086 pages Dialing by Using the Hook Button Note You can use the Hook button only when Hook key setting is set to Enable. For details, see Hook key setting . 1. Press the FAX button. 2. Press the Hook button. 3. Use the Numeric buttons to dial the number of the information service. 4. When the recorded message for the information service answers, press the Tone button to switch to tone dialing.
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM Page 747 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Transmission/ Reception of Faxes Using ECM Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM This machine is set to send/receive faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM). If the recipient's fax machine is compatible with ECM, ECM automatically corrects errors and resends the fax.
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes This machine has two functions for preventing the mistransmission of faxes.
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes 6. Use the button to select ON, then press the OK button. Follow the procedure below to send a fax with this function. 1. Enter the fax/telephone number using the Numeric buttons, then press the OK button. Re-enter the number for confirmation. is displayed on the LCD. 2. Enter the number, then press the OK button. If the number is not identical with the number entered first, go back to step 1. 3.
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes 6. Use the Page 750 of 1086 pages button to select ON, then press the OK button. Important Transmission will be canceled if the machine fails to receive the recipient's fax information or if the received information does not match the fax number. This function is not available when you send a fax manually. For details, see Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone .
Receiving Faxes Page 751 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Receiving Faxes Receiving Faxes Refer to Receiving Faxes for information on receiving faxes or the receive mode settings.
Changing the Print Settings Page 752 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Changing the Print Settings Changing the Print Settings This machine prints received faxes to paper loaded in the machine beforehand. You can use the Operation Panel to change the paper settings for printing faxes. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the loaded paper. Important If you are using MX870 series, load Legal-sized paper on the Rear Tray.
Changing the Print Settings Page 753 of 1086 pages MX870 series: The paper type is set to Plain paper. MX350 series: Select Plain paper. 3. 2-sidedPrintSetting (MX870 series) Select two-sided printing or single-sided printing. Two sided printing is available for black & white faxes. Color faxes are printed on the singleside of paper regardless of this setting. Note When 8.5"x14"(Legal) is selected as the page size, you cannot select a paper source other than the Rear Tray.
Setting the Number of Rings for Fax Calls Page 754 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Setting the Number of Rings for Fax Calls Setting the Number of Rings for Fax Calls You can specify how many times the external device rings for fax calls from Incoming ring in Reception settings. MX870 series: You can specify whether the external device rings for fax calls when Fax priority mode or Fax only mode is selected.
Using the Useful Reception Functions Page 755 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using the Useful Reception Functions Using the Useful Reception Functions Memory Reception Remote Reception Rejecting Fax Reception Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls Page top
Memory Reception Page 756 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Memory Reception Memory Reception If the machine receives a fax under one of the following conditions, it will not be able to print the received fax and will store it in its memory. The In Use/Memory lamp is lit and Received in memory is displayed on the LCD. When the problem is resolved as described, the fax stored in memory is printed automatically.
Remote Reception Page 757 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Remote Reception Remote Reception If the machine is located away from the telephone, pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the machine and dial 25 (the remote reception ID) to receive faxes (remote reception). If you use a rotary pulse line, temporarily switch your telephone to tone dialing.
Rejecting Fax Reception Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Rejecting Fax Reception Rejecting Fax Reception You can set the machine to reject faxes with no sender information or those from specific senders. Select one of the following conditions to reject faxes. Faxes with no caller identification. Faxes from senders not registered to the speed dial codes. Faxes from senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers. 1.
Rejecting Fax Reception Page 759 of 1086 pages No sender info. Rejects faxes with no caller identification. 1-touch/code unset (MX870 series), Coded dial unset (MX350 series) Rejects faxes from the senders not registered to the speed dial codes. Rejected numbers Rejects faxes from the senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers. If you select Rejected numbers, follow the procedure below to register a fax/telephone number to reject. 1. Select Yes when the confirmation screen is displayed.
Rejecting Fax Reception Page 760 of 1086 pages To register the number: 1. Use the button to select the dial code, then press the OK button. 2. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number to reject, then press the OK button. Data entry OK. is displayed on the LCD, then the LCD returns to the screen for registering a rejected number. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to continue to register the number to reject. To edit the number: 1.
Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls If you subscribe to the Caller ID service, the machine detects the sender's Caller ID. If the sender's ID does not match the conditions specified in this setting, the machine rejects the phone call or fax reception from the sender. 1. Press the Setup button. 2.
Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls Page 762 of 1086 pages numbers in Fax reception reject. For details, see Rejecting Fax Reception . Reject: Rejects the phone call or fax reception matching the condition specified by this setting. If you select Reject for Rejected numbers, Register rejected numbers? is displayed on the LCD. Select Yes to register a fax/telephone number to reject. For details, see Rejecting Fax Reception .
Document Stored in Memory Page 763 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Document Stored in Memory Document Stored in Memory In the following cases, the machine is not able to print the received fax and will automatically store the fax in its memory. Ink has run out. Paper has run out. A different size of paper from that specified by Page size is loaded. Page size is set to other than A4, 8.5"x11"(LTR), or 8.
Printing a Document in Memory Page 764 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Document Stored in Memory > Printing a Document in Memory Printing a Document in Memory If the machine was not able to send a fax or print a received fax, it stores the unsent or unprinted fax in its memory. If an error occurred during a fax transmission, the document is not stored in memory.
Printing a Document in Memory Page 765 of 1086 pages *. Date and time of transaction and fax/telephone number +. Transaction number (TX/RX NO.) A transaction number from 0001 to 4999 indicates a document being sent. A transaction number from 5001 to 9999 indicates a document being received. ,. Color information 3. Use the button to select Yes or No, then press the OK button. If you select Yes, only the first page of the document will be printed.
Deleting a Document in Memory Page 766 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Document Stored in Memory > Deleting a Document in Memory Deleting a Document in Memory Deleting a Specified Document in Memory Deleting All the Documents in Memory Deleting a Specified Document in Memory 1. Press the FAX button, then press the right Function button. The memory reference screen is displayed. 2. Use the 3.
Deleting a Document in Memory Page 767 of 1086 pages Note This function is not available while the machine is receiving a fax.
Saving a Document in Memory to a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page 768 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Document Stored in Memory > Saving a Document in Memory to a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Saving a Document in Memory to a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive You can save sent/received faxes on a memory card or a USB flash drive as PDF files using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Saving a Document in Memory to a Memory Card/USB Flash Drive Page 769 of 1086 pages The specified document is saved. To save other documents, repeat step 5. 6. Press the Back button or Stop button. Note With MX870 series, you can save up to 250 pages of fax as one PDF file. With MX350 series, you can save up to 50 pages of fax as one PDF file. You can save up to 2000 PDF files on a memory card or USB flash drive.
Summary of Reports and Lists Page 770 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Summary of Reports and Lists Summary of Reports and Lists The table below shows the reports and lists that can be printed from the machine. Refer to the pages indicated for more details. Report or List Description Activity report Shows recent fax transactions performed by the machine.
Summary of Reports and Lists Printing the Activity report manually 1. Load paper. Refer to Loading Paper / Originals . 2. Press the FAX button, then press the left Function button. The FAX menu screen is displayed. 3. Select 4. Use the button to select Activity report, then press the OK button. 5. Use the button to select Yes, then press the OK button. Print reports/lists, then press the OK button. The Activity report is printed.
Summary of Reports and Lists 3. Select 4. Use the button to select User's data list, then press the OK button. 5. Use the button to select Yes, then press the OK button. Print reports/lists, then press the OK button. The User's data list is printed. Rejected Number List Printing the Rejected number list 1. Load paper. Refer to Loading Paper / Originals . 2. Press the FAX button, then press the left Function button. The FAX menu screen is displayed. 3.
Summary of Reports and Lists 4. Use the button to select Rejected number list, then press the OK button. 5. Use the button to select Yes, then press the OK button. The Rejected number list is printed. Caller History List This function may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. Printing the Caller history list 1. Load paper. Refer to Loading Paper / Originals . 2. Press the FAX button, then press the left Function button. The FAX menu screen is displayed. 3.
Summary of Reports and Lists 5. Use the Page 774 of 1086 pages button to select Yes, then press the OK button. The Caller history list is printed. TX Report This machine can print a TX (transmission) report after sending a document, confirming whether the transmission has been completed successfully. At the time of purchase, TX reports are set to be printed only when a transmission error occurred.
Summary of Reports and Lists Page 775 of 1086 pages Checking Information (Checking the Recipient's Information) . #085 Try again in black & white STOP The Stop button was pressed during transmission. transmission. The recipient's fax machine is not colorcompatible. Resend the document in black & white. The Stop button was pressed to cancel transmission of the document. Resend it if necessary.
Using Speed Dial Utility Page 776 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility Using Speed Dial Utility About Speed Dial Utility Speed Dial Utility is a utility for forwarding the fax/telephone numbers registered on the machine to a computer and registering/changing them on the computer.
Starting Up Speed Dial Utility Page 777 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Starting Up Speed Dial Utility Starting Up Speed Dial Utility Before starting up Speed Dial Utility, confirm the following: The necessary application software (MP Drivers and Speed Dial Utility) is installed.
Speed Dial Utility Dialog box Page 778 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Speed Dial Utility Dialog box Speed Dial Utility Dialog box The following items are on the Speed Dial Utility dialog box. The screen of MX870 series is used for explanation. 1. Printer Name Selects the machine for editing the registered information using Speed Dial Utility. 2.
Speed Dial Utility Dialog box Page 779 of 1086 pages 8. Exit Quits Speed Dial Utility. Information registered or edited using Speed Dial Utility is neither saved on the computer nor registered on the machine. 9. Save to PC... Saves information edited using Speed Dial Utility on the computer. 10. Register to Printer Registers information edited using Speed Dial Utility to the machine.
Saving Registered Information on the Machine to your PC Page 780 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Saving Registered Information on the Machine to your PC Saving Registered Information on the Machine to your PC Follow the procedure below to save the speed dial/group dial numbers, user's name, fax/telephone number, or rejected numbers on the machine to the computer. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.
Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to register fax/telephone numbers. The screens of MX870 series are used for explanation.
Registering Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Page 782 of 1086 pages 1. Enter the group name. 2. Select the code you want to add to the group dial, then click Add. Note You can only enter numbers that have already been registered to coded speed dial codes. 6. Click OK. To continue registering fax/telephone numbers or a group dial, repeat steps 4 to 6. To save the registered information on the computer. 1. Click Save to PC.... 2.
Changing Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Page 783 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Changing Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Changing Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to change fax/telephone numbers. The screens of MX870 series are used for explanation.
Changing Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Page 784 of 1086 pages To add a member: Select the code to add to the group dial, then click Add. To delete a member: Select the code to delete from the group dial, then click Delete. 5. Click OK. To continue changing fax/telephone numbers or group dials, repeat steps 4 and 5. To save the edited information on the computer. 1. Click Save to PC.... 2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
Deleting Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Page 785 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Deleting Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Deleting Recipients for Speed Dialing Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to delete fax/telephone numbers.
Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility Page 786 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to change the user's name or fax/telephone number. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. Starting Up Speed Dial Utility 2.
Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility Page 787 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete rejected numbers. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. Starting Up Speed Dial Utility 2.
Calling the Registered Information Up from your PC and Registering the Info...
Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility Page 789 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending/Receiving Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Using Speed Dial Utility > Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to uninstall Speed Dial Utility. Important Log into a user account with administrator privilege. 1. Click Start > All Programs (or Programs) > Canon Utilities > Speed Dial Utility > Speed Dial Utility Uninstall. 2.
Sending Faxes from a Computer Page 790 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending Faxes from a Computer Sending Faxes from a Computer Sending a FAX Creating an Address Book Page top
Sending a FAX Page 791 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending Faxes from a Computer > Sending a FAX Sending a FAX You can send faxes using the fax driver from applications that support document printing. Note You can only specify one fax recipient. You cannot send a fax to two or more recipients in one operation. Only black and white transmission is supported. 1. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Word), and then click the Print command. (The command is Print...
Sending a FAX Page 792 of 1086 pages Note You can also register a recipient in the recipient list by following the instructions below: 1. Click Display Address Book..., select a recipient from the recipient list 2. Click Add to Recipient List 3. Click OK For details on valid characters, see the help for the fax driver. You can register the recipient you entered to the address book by clicking Add to Address Book.... For details on the address book, see " Creating an Address Book ." 5. Click Send Now.
Sending a FAX Page 793 of 1086 pages Page top
Creating an Address Book Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending Faxes from a Computer > Creating an Address Book Creating an Address Book By using the address book, you can send a fax by simply specifying a recipient from it. You can register the recipient's name, fax number and other information in the address book. Registering a recipient (WAB contact) in the address book You can register an individual recipient (Contact) in the address book. 1.
Creating an Address Book Page 795 of 1086 pages Select Create new Windows Address Book file for MP., then click OK. You can also change the setting later so as to be able to use another address book. For details, see the help for the fax driver. Using an Existing Windows Address Book Select this option if you do not create a new address book file exclusively for faxing. Click Select existing Windows Address Book file., select an address book file from the list, then click OK.
Creating an Address Book Page 796 of 1086 pages 6. Enter the First, Middle, and Last of the contact in the Name and E-mail tab (Name tab when using other than Windows 7/Windows Vista) on the Properties screen. The recipient's name will be printed at the top of the fax received by the recipient. 7. Enter the fax number on the Home or Work tab, then click OK. Note You can also register a recipient by clicking the Add to Address Book... button on the Send Fax dialog box after entering the recipient.
Creating an Address Book Page 797 of 1086 pages Note In Windows XP/Windows 2000, you can use or import another Windows Address Book. For details, see the help for the fax driver.
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending Faxes from a Computer > Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book You can change the recipients' names, fax numbers and other information, or delete recipients registered in the address book. Editing Recipients in an address book You can edit the contact information registered in the address book. 1.
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book 5. Change information as needed on the Properties dialog box, then click OK. Removing Recipients from an address book You can delete the contacts registered in the address book. 1. From the Start menu, navigate as follows: Windows 7: From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Windows Vista: From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book Page 800 of 1086 pages 3. In the Canon (model name) series FAX Printing Preferences dialog box, click Address Book.... 4. Select the recipient you want to delete from the Address Book dialog box, then click Delete. 5. When a confirmation message is displayed, click Yes.
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book Page 801 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Faxing > Sending Faxes from a Computer > Search for a Recipient in an Address Book Search for a Recipient in an Address Book You can search for recipients registered in the address book by name. 1. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Word), and then click the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.) 2.
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book Page 802 of 1086 pages Important You cannot search by criteria other than name.
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Commu...
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 804 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings Page top
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 805 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device You can connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera, camcorder, or mobile phone connect to the machine using a USB cable recommended by the d
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 806 of 1086 pages 5. Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout. You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge compliant device. Select the size and type of paper that you loaded in the machine. Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device If your PictBridge compliant device does not have a setting menu, change the setting from the machine. Settings on the Machine 6.
About PictBridge Print Settings Page 807 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device > About PictBridge Print Settings About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device Settings on the Machine Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device This section describes the PictBridge function of the machine.
About PictBridge Print Settings Trimming Page 808 of 1086 pages Default (Off: No trimming), On (follow the camera's setting), Off Settings on the Machine You can change the PictBridge print settings from the PictBridge print settings screen. Set the print settings to Default on the PictBridge compliant device when you want to print according to the settings on the machine. This section describes the procedure to display the PictBridge print settings screen.
Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device Page 809 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device Printing via Bluetooth Communication Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from a Mobile Phone Page top
Printing via Bluetooth Communication Page 810 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device > Printing via Bluetooth Communication Printing via Bluetooth Communication This section describes the procedure to print photos through Bluetooth communication from a mobile phone with the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30.
Printing via Bluetooth Communication Page 811 of 1086 pages Note You can set the page size, media type, and layout before printing. Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from a Mobile Phone 7. Start printing from a mobile phone. For the device name, select the default value Canon XXX-1 (where "XXX" is your machine's name). If you are required to input a passkey, input the default value "0000".
Changing the Bluetooth Settings Page 812 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device > Printing via Bluetooth Communication > Changing the Bluetooth Settings Changing the Bluetooth Settings As preparation for printing through Bluetooth communication, you can change the settings such as the device name and passkey from the Bluetooth settings screen.
Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from a Mobile ...
Maintenance Page 814 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance Maintenance Cleaning Your Machine Aligning the Print Head Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page top
Cleaning Your Machine Page 815 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine Cleaning Your Machine Cleaning Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Cleaning the ADF Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Page top
Cleaning Page 816 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning Cleaning This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your machine. Important Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning the exterior of the machine so as not to scratch the surface. Be sure to use a soft cloth.
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Page 817 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently. Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning. Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Page 818 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine. The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when there are unsent faxes stored in the machine's memory.
Cleaning the ADF Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the ADF Cleaning the ADF Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine. The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when there are unsent faxes stored in the machine's memory. The machine cannot receive faxes when the power is turned off. If you disconnect the power cord, all the documents stored in memory are deleted.
Cleaning the ADF Page 820 of 1086 pages 4. After wiping, close the Document Feeder Cover by pushing it until it clicks into place. 5. Close the Document Tray.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Page 821 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) This section explains how to clean the inside of the machine. If the inside of the machine becomes dirty, printed paper may get dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Page 822 of 1086 pages Note When performing Bottom Plate Cleaning again, be sure to use a new sheet of paper.
Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Page 823 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Machine If protrusions inside the machine are stained, wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like. Important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine.
Aligning the Print Head Page 824 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Page top
Aligning the Print Head Page 825 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Aligning the Print Head > Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position. Note If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly. Replace the FINE Cartridge whose ink is low. Routine Maintenance 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Aligning the Print Head Page 826 of 1086 pages Important Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet. Be careful not to get the print head alignment sheet dirty. If the sheet is stained or wrinkled, it may not be scanned properly. 5. When Did the patterns print correctly? is displayed, confirm that the pattern is printed correctly, button to select Yes, then press the OK button. use the 5. Scan the print head alignment sheet to adjust the print head position. 1.
Aligning the Print Head Page 827 of 1086 pages Do not open the Document Cover or remove the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass until adjusting the print head position is completed. If adjusting the auto print head position has failed, Failed to scan head alignment sheet. is displayed on the LCD. An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD 3. When the completion message is displayed, press the OK button. The screen will return to the Maintenance screen.
Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page 828 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Machine Page top
Cleaning the Print Heads Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head. Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink. The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows: Cleaning 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Cleaning the Print Heads Page 830 of 1086 pages 5. Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check process, click Cancel. Important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink. Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning. Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently, perform cleaning only when necessary.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 831 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleans the paper feed roller. Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly. The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows: Roller Cleaning 1. Prepare the machine Remove all sheets of paper from the rear tray. 2.
Aligning the Print Head Position Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Aligning the Print Head Position Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines. This machine supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment.
Aligning the Print Head Position Page 833 of 1086 pages When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK. Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks. (A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks (B) More noticeable vertical white streaks If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks.
Aligning the Print Head Position Page 834 of 1086 pages When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK. Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks. (A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks (B) More noticeable vertical white streaks 11. Confirm the displayed message and click OK The third pattern is printed. Important Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress. 12.
Aligning the Print Head Position Page 835 of 1086 pages When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK. Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white stripes. (A) Less noticeable horizontal white stripes (B) More noticeable horizontal white stripes Note To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click Print Alignment Value.
Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page 836 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Checking the Print Head Nozzles Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print. The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows: Nozzle Check 1.
Cleaning Inside the Machine Page 837 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning Inside the Machine Cleaning Inside the Machine Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper. Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page.
About Bluetooth Communication Page 838 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication About Bluetooth Communication Handling Precautions Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Bluetooth Settings Troubleshooting Specifications Page top
Handling Precautions Page 839 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Handling Precautions Handling Precautions Shipping the Product Page top
Shipping the Product Page 840 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Handling Precautions > Shipping the Product Shipping the Product This product may not be used in countries or regions other than the country or region where it was purchased due to local laws and regulations. Please note that the use of this product in such countries or regions may lead to penalties and that Canon should not be liable for such punishment.
Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Page 841 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit Bluetooth Unit Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Page top
Bluetooth Unit Page 842 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit > Bluetooth Unit Bluetooth Unit The Bluetooth Unit BU-30 (hereafter referred to as the Bluetooth unit) is an adaptor which can be used with a Canon IJ printer with Bluetooth interface. By attaching the Bluetooth unit to a Canon IJ printer with Bluetooth interface, wireless printing from a Bluetooth enabled device, such as a computer or mobile phone, is possible.
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Page 843 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit > Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Attaching the Bluetooth Unit to the Printer Removing the Bluetooth Unit from the Printer Attaching the Bluetooth Unit to the Printer Attach the Bluetooth unit to the Direct Print Port (A) of the printer in accordance with the following procedure.
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer Page 844 of 1086 pages Note When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer with the Power lamp, the Power lamp on the printer flashes twice. When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer without the Power lamp, the message is displayed on the LCD. Removing the Bluetooth Unit from the Printer Remove the Bluetooth unit from the Direct Print Port of the printer in accordance with the following procedure. 1.
Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Page 845 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication Preparation Installing the MP Drivers Setting the Printer Registering the Printer Deleting the Printer Page top
Preparation Page 846 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Preparation Preparation In order to print via Bluetooth communication with Windows, the following system requirements must be satisfied. Computer A computer in which an internal Bluetooth module is installed or a computer to which an optional Bluetooth adapter (available from various manufacturers) is attached.
Preparation Page 847 of 1086 pages When using Windows XP SP2 or later, and when Bluetooth Devices is displayed in Printers and Other Hardware under Control Panel Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth Devices in Printers and Other Hardware under Control Panel. See Registering the Printer . When using a Toshiba Windows Vista or Windows XP computer Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Settings*.
Installing the MP Drivers Page 848 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Note If you use the printer connecting with a computer, the MP Drivers have already been installed. In this case, move to the next step.
Setting the Printer Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Setting the Printer Setting the Printer This section describes the procedures for checking the settings of the Bluetooth unit on the LCD of the printer in preparation for Bluetooth printing. Canon IJ printers with the Bluetooth interface are divided into two types. One is equipped with a graphic LCD, and the other with a text LCD.
Setting the Printer Page 850 of 1086 pages Text LCD 4. Check the device name. The device name is necessary to register the printer as a Bluetooth device. Be sure to note the device name. Note If multiple printer units with the same model name are connected to the system, assigning a different device name to each printer is recommended for easy identification of the printer you will use. See Bluetooth Settings Screen . After checking the device name, press the OK button on the printer.
Registering the Printer Page 851 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Registering the Printer Registering the Printer Register the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Devices (Add a Bluetooth Device in Windows 7) under Control Panel. Note Before registering the printer on Bluetooth Devices (Add a Bluetooth Device in Windows 7) under Control Panel, enable the Bluetooth function of your computer.
Registering the Printer Page 852 of 1086 pages When registering this printer, Pairing with this wireless device (Connecting with this device in Windows 7) is displayed. Note If you set a passkey on the printer, select Enter the device's pairing code and input the passkey, then click Next. For more information about setting a passkey, see Bluetooth Settings Screen . 5. When This wireless device is paired with this computer is displayed, click Close.
Registering the Printer Page 853 of 1086 pages this message again for this device. In Windows XP: 1. Log into a user account with the administrator privilege. 2. Click Control Panel, Printers and Other Hardware, then Bluetooth Devices. 3. Click Add on the Devices sheet. Add Bluetooth Device Wizard will start. 4. Make sure that the printer is turned on, check the My device is set up and ready to be found check box and then click Next. 5. Select the device name of the printer and click Next.
Registering the Printer Page 854 of 1086 pages Select the same device name as that checked under Setting the Printer. Note If the device name is not displayed, see Check 3: Is the printer name which you want to register displayed in Printer List?. 6. Select Don't use a passkey, and then Next. Note If you set a passkey on the printer, select Use the passkey found in the documentation and input the passkey then click Next. For more information about a passkey, see Bluetooth Settings Screen . 7.
Registering the Printer Page 855 of 1086 pages 8. Check that the device name selected at step 5 is registered on the Devices sheet, and click OK. Now, the settings for printing via Bluetooth communication are ready.
Deleting the Printer Page 856 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Deleting the Printer Deleting the Printer This section describes the procedure to delete the registered printer. If you want to re-register the printer as a Bluetooth device, first follow the procedure below to delete the printer, and then re-register it. For the procedure to re-register the printer, see Registering the Printer .
Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Page 857 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication Printing with Computers Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer Page top
Printing with Computers Page 858 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication > Printing with Computers Printing with Computers When using Bluetooth communication, also refer to the computer's instruction manual. When printing from a Bluetooth compliant device other than a computer, see Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer. Note Depending on your application program, operations may differ.
Printing with Computers 1. Select the print setting in Commonly Used Settings. 2. Confirm the required print settings in Media Type, Printer Paper Size, and so on. Note You can specify the advanced print settings on Main sheet and Page Setup sheet. For details on the print settings, refer to Various Printing Methods . 3. Click OK. The Print dialog box is displayed. 5. Click Print (or OK) to print the document. Printing begins.
Printing with Computers Page 860 of 1086 pages When you use a USB cable for printing, select Canon XXX Printer from Select Printer. To cancel a print job in progress, press the Stop button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor. After printing is canceled, a sheet of paper may be ejected with no printing results. To display the printer status monitor, click Canon XXX Printer (Copy X) on the taskbar. "X" is a device name or a digit.
Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer Page 861 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication > Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer The LCD of the printer allows you to perform settings for printing using Bluetooth compliant devices other than a computer.
Bluetooth Settings Page 862 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Settings Setting Bluetooth Printing Bluetooth Settings Screen Page top
Setting Bluetooth Printing Page 863 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings > Setting Bluetooth Printing Setting Bluetooth Printing 1. Make sure that the printer is turned on, and attach the Bluetooth unit. Note When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer with the Power lamp, the Power lamp on the printer flashes twice. When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer without the Power lamp, the message is displayed on the LCD. 2.
Bluetooth Settings Screen Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings > Bluetooth Settings Screen Bluetooth Settings Screen Canon IJ printers with the Bluetooth interface are divided into two types. One is equipped with a graphic LCD, and the other with a text LCD. Graphic LCD Text LCD 1. Select device name/Device name Displays the device name of the printer to which the Bluetooth unit is attached. Select device name/Device name Screen 2.
Bluetooth Settings Screen Select device name/Device name Screen Allows you to set the device name of the printer on a Bluetooth device. In the example used for this explanation, the model name is set to MX870 series. When a model other than MX870 series is used, whatever appears in place of "MX870" becomes the model name use. Ex: When you select MX870 series-2, the printer name displayed on the Bluetooth device is Canon MX870 series-2. The initial value is set to MX870 series-1.
Bluetooth Settings Screen Page 866 of 1086 pages Change passkey/Passkey Screen When you select Enable on the Security settings screen, you are required to set a passkey to register the printer on other Bluetooth devices. After you change the passkey, you may be asked to input the passkey on the Bluetooth devices you were able to print from before the passkey was changed. In this case, input the new passkey.
Troubleshooting Page 867 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Printer Cannot be Registered Printing Does Not Start Page top
Troubleshooting Page 868 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve the problems occurred during the use of the Bluetooth unit. Problems related to the printer's hardware, MP Drivers installation, and so on, are also described in Troubleshooting .
Printer Cannot be Registered Page 869 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Printer Cannot be Registered Printer Cannot be Registered Check 1: Have MP Drivers been installed? If MP Drivers are not yet installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers. Check 2: Is unsupported Bluetooth driver used? Confirm that the Bluetooth driver installed on your computer is supported.
Printer Cannot be Registered 1. Page 870 of 1086 pages Display the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD of the printer. For information about how to display the Bluetooth settings screen, refer to Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD . 2. Select Access refusal setting/Access refusal. 3. Select OFF and press the OK button on the printer.
Printing Does Not Start Page 871 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Printing Does Not Start Printing Does Not Start Check 1: Is Bluetooth unit ready for use? Make sure that the Bluetooth settings screen can be displayed on the LCD of the printer. If the screen cannot be displayed, Bluetooth communication is disabled. Remove the Bluetooth unit from the printer and attach it once again.
Printing Does Not Start Page 872 of 1086 pages For Windows Vista When authenticating the printer as a Bluetooth device in Control Panel BTHnnn (Canon XXX Printer (Copy X)) ("n" is a digit). When authenticating the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Settings built in the computer TBPnnn (Canon XXX Printer (Copy X)) ("n" is a digit) For more information about how to register the printer, see Register the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Devices. in Preparation . 6. Click OK.
Printing Does Not Start Page 873 of 1086 pages Check 5: Were the MP Drivers installed after printer registration on Bluetooth Devices (Add a Bluetooth Device in Windows 7)? If you have installed the MP Drivers after registering the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth Devices (Add a Bluetooth Device in Windows 7), delete the printer and then register it again. For more information about the procedure, see Preparation .
Specifications Page 874 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Specifications Specifications Communication method Bluetooth v2.0 Maximum Speed 1.44 Mbps Output Bluetooth Power Class 2 Communication distance Line-of-sight distance: approx. 33 ft.
Changing the Machine Settings Page 875 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings Changing the Machine Settings Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page top
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 876 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD FAX settings Print settings LAN settings Device user settings Mobile phone print settings Bluetooth settings PictBridge print settings Language selection Reset setting Page top
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 877 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the steps to specify Extended copy amount as an example. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Press the Setup button. 3.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Page 878 of 1086 pages FAX settings Print settings LAN settings Device user settings Mobile phone print settings Bluetooth settings PictBridge print settings Language selection Reset setting Page top
FAX settings Page 879 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > FAX settings FAX settings This section describes the setting items in FAX user settings, Transmission settings, and Reception settings in the FAX settings menu. FAX user settings Transmission settings Reception settings Note Before changing the settings, you can confirm the current settings by printing the User's Data List. For details, see User's Data List .
FAX settings Offhook alarm Enables/disables the alarm that alerts you if the handset of the telephone connected to the machine is not hung up properly. Volume control RX ring volume: Selects the ring volume when the machine receives a fax. Line monitor volume: Selects the line monitor volume. RX ring level Adjusts the level of the ringing sound the machine makes when it receives a fax. You can select either Standard or High. Telephone line type Selects the telephone line type setting for the machine.
FAX settings Page 881 of 1086 pages connection is poor, selecting a lower transmission speed may solve transmission problems. Color transmission When faxing color documents using the ADF, selects whether to convert them into black & white data if the recipient's fax machine does not support color faxing. TX report Enables/disables automatic printing of a transmission report after a fax transmission.
FAX settings Page 882 of 1086 pages Default action Sets whether to receive the fax after the specified ring time has elapsed. For details on the fax priority mode, refer to Receiving Faxes . DRPD: Fax ring pattern Sets the distinctive ring pattern of a call that the machine assumes is a fax call. If you subscribe to a DRPD service, set the ring pattern to match the pattern assigned by your telephone company.
FAX settings Page 883 of 1086 pages No sender info. Rejects faxes with no caller identification. 1-touch/code unset (MX870 series)/Coded dial unset (MX350 series) Rejects faxes from senders not registered to speed dial codes. Rejected numbers Rejects faxes from senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers. Caller rejection If you subscribe to the Caller ID service, the machine detects the sender's Caller ID.
Print settings Page 884 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Print settings Print settings Prevent paper abrasion Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged. Important Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower print quality. Extended copy amount Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when printing in borderless (full).
LAN settings Page 885 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > LAN settings LAN settings Change wireless/wired Activates either wireless LAN or wired LAN. You can also deactivate wireless/wired LAN. Note When you change the connection method (wired or wireless), set up the machine according to the method you will use. For details, refer to your setup manual. Wireless LAN setup Selects the setting method for wireless LAN connection.
LAN settings Page 886 of 1086 pages XXXX: XXXX MAC address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX IPsec settings - Enable (ESP)/Enable (ESP & AH)/ Enable (AH)/Disable Pre-shared key - XXXXXXXXXXX Printer name XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Bonjour service Canon MX350 series Canon MX350 series name _XXXXXXXXXXXX _XXXXXXXXXXXX ("X" represents an alphanumeric character ranging from 0 to 9 and A to F.) LAN setting list The list of wired LAN settings of this machine is displayed on the LCD.
LAN settings Page 887 of 1086 pages WSD setting Activates/deactivates the WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 7 and Windows Vista) setting. Note When this setting is activated, the printer icon is displayed on the Network Explorer in Windows 7 and Windows Vista. LLTD setting Activates/deactivates the Link Layer Topology Discovery (LLTD) setting. When this setting is activated, Network Map for Windows 7 or Windows Vista is available.
Device user settings Page 888 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Device user settings Device user settings Date/time setting Sets the current date and time. Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing Date display format Sets the format of dates displayed on the LCD and printed on sent faxes, copies, and photos. Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing Three date formats are available; YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, and DD/MM/YYYY.
Device user settings Page 889 of 1086 pages Quiet mode setting Enables this function on the machine if you want to reduce the operating noise, such as when printing at night.
Mobile phone print settings Page 890 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Mobile phone print settings Mobile phone print settings When printing from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, select the print settings such as page size, media type, layout, and so on. For details on how to print from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, see Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device .
Bluetooth settings Page 891 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Bluetooth settings Bluetooth settings You can change the device name of the machine, passkey, and so on in the Bluetooth settings. For details on how to print from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, see Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device .
PictBridge print settings Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > PictBridge print settings PictBridge print settings You can change the print settings when printing from a PictBridge compliant device. Set the print settings to Default on the PictBridge compliant device when you want to print according to the settings on the machine. See Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device to change print settings from the PictBridge compliant device.
PictBridge print settings 1. Page 893 of 1086 pages Vivid photo Makes green and blue more lively. 2. PhotoOptimizer pro Automatically optimizes brightness and tone of a photo. 3. Noise reduction Reduces the noise on blue areas like the sky as well as on black areas. 4. Face brightener Brightens a darkened face on a photo taken against the light. 5. Image optimizer Corrects and smoothes the jagged contours for printing. 6. Brightness Adjust brightness. 7. Contrast Adjust contrast. 8.
Language selection Page 894 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Language selection Language selection Changes the language for LCD messages and menus.
Reset setting Page 895 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Reset setting Reset setting Reverts all settings you made to the machine back to default. However, some data may not be changed, depending on the current usage state of your machine. Telephone number only Reverts the telephone number settings to default. Setting only Reverts the machine settings other than the telephone number settings to default.
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Page 896 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Ink Cartridge Managing the Machine Power Reducing the Machine Noise Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page top
Changing the Print Options Page 897 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the Print Options Changing the Print Options You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software. Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off. The procedure for changing the print options is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 898 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab. Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 899 of 1086 pages 4. Save the settings Enter a name in the Name field, and if necessary, set the items in Options.... Then click OK. The printing profile is saved, and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again. The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list. Important To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options..., and check each item.
Setting the Ink Cartridge Page 900 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Setting the Ink Cartridge Setting the Ink Cartridge This feature enables you to specify the most appropriate ink cartridge among installed cartridges according to an intended use. When one of the ink cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one, you can specify the other ink cartridge that still has ink and continue printing.
Managing the Machine Power Page 901 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Managing the Machine Power Managing the Machine Power This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver. The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows: Power Off The Power Off function turns off the machine. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the machine on from the printer driver. 1.
Reducing the Machine Noise Page 902 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Reducing the Machine Noise Reducing the Machine Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise. Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night, etc. Using this function may lower the print speed. The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows: Quiet Mode 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Changing the Machine Operation Mode Page 903 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the Machine Operation Mode Changing the Machine Operation Mode If necessary, switch between various modes of machine operation. The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows: Custom Settings 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Troubleshooting Page 904 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Machine Cannot Be Powered On An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the LCD LCD Cannot Be Seen At All An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD Cannot Install the MP Drivers Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Print Results Not Satisfactory Printing Does Not Start Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Machine
Troubleshooting Page 905 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting tips for problems you may encounter when using the printer. For troubleshooting tips related to the setup, refer to the Network Setup Troubleshooting .
If an Error Occurs Page 906 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > If an Error Occurs If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message. The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system.
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Page 907 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > The Machine Cannot Be Powered On The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Check 1: Press the ON button. Check 2: Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the Power Cord Connector of the machine, then turn it back on. Check 3: Unplug the machine from the power supply, then plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 3 minutes.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 908 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD If an error message is displayed on the LCD, take the corresponding action described below. Action Message Print head is not installed. Install the print head. U051 The type of print head is incorrect. Install the correct print head. U052 The following ink cartridge cannot be recognized.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 909 of 1086 pages If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing, press the machine's Stop button for at least 5 seconds with the ink cartridge installed. Then printing can continue under the ink out condition. The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled. Replace the empty ink cartridge immediately after the printing. The resulting print quality is not satisfactory, if printing is continued under the ink out condition.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 910 of 1086 pages The ink absorber is almost full. Press OK to continue printing. Contact the service center. The ink absorber is almost full. Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center. Printer error has occurred. Contact the service center. The machine error has occurred. Contact the service center. Timeout error has occurred. Press OK.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD Page 911 of 1086 pages jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the FINE Cartridge Holder from moving, and turn on the machine again. Important Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine. The machine may not print out properly if you touch it. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. 6000 is displayed: If any object is placed in front of the machine, remove it.
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the LCD Page 912 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the LCD A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the LCD Action Message Auto redial The machine is waiting to redial the recipient's number because the line was busy or the recipient did not answer when you tried to send a document. Wait for the machine to automatically redial the number.
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the LCD Page 913 of 1086 pages select ON for Auto print, and the fax stored in memory will be printed automatically. Document Stored in Memory Paper has run out: Load the paper and press the OK button. A different size of paper from that specified by Page size is loaded: Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button. Page size is set to other than A4, 8.5"x11"(LTR), or 8.5"x14"(Legal) (MX350 series): Set Page size to A4, 8.
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the LCD Page 914 of 1086 pages paper. * Legal may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. Change the paper. A4/8.5x11/8.5x14 Plain paper The page size setting is set to a size other than A4, Letter-, or Legal-size. Set Page size to A4, 8.5"x11"(LTR), or 8.5"x14"(Legal) and Type to Plain paper to print received faxes. * Legal may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. Fax info does not match.
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All Page 915 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > LCD Cannot Be Seen At All LCD Cannot Be Seen At All If all the lamps on the Operation Panel are off The machine is not powered on. Connect the power cord and press the ON button. If any lamp on the Operation Panel is lit The LCD may be in the screen-saver mode. On the Operation Panel, press a button other than the ON button.
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD Page 916 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD Select the language you want to be displayed according to the following procedure. 1. Press the Setup button, then wait for about 5 seconds. 2. Select 3. Press the Device settings, then press the OK button. button 5 times, then press the OK button.
Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 917 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Install the MP Drivers Cannot Install the MP Drivers Important If you cannot install the MP Drivers when you use the machine over LAN, refer to the setup manual. If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD-ROM is inserted into your computer's disc drive: Start the installation following the procedure below. 1. Click Start then Computer. In Windows XP, click Start then My Computer.
Cannot Install the MP Drivers Page 918 of 1086 pages securely plugged into the USB port of the machine and is connected to the computer, and then follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers. Note The printer is not detected. Check the connection. may be displayed depending on the computer you use. In this case, follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers. 1. Click Cancel on the Printer Connection screen. 2. Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen. 3.
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Page 919 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB Connection Does Not Work/"This device can perform faster" Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi-Speed USB, the machine will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1.1.
Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 920 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, confirm the paper and print quality settings first. Check 1: Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper? When these settings are incorrect, you cannot obtain a proper print result.
Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 921 of 1086 pages See also the sections below: Cannot Print to End of Job No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Colors Are Unclear Lines Are Misaligned Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page top
Cannot Print to End of Job Page 922 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Cannot Print to End of Job Cannot Print to End of Job Check 1: Is the size of the print data extremely large? Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet. Then, select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog. Check 2: Is the space of your computer's hard disk sufficient? Delete unnecessary files to free disk space.
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Page 923 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Page 924 of 1086 pages Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Is the FINE Cartridge installed properly? If the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover is not closed securely, ink may not be ejected correctly. Open the Scanning Unit (Cover), open the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover, then close the Ink Cartridge Locking Cover.
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Page 925 of 1086 pages the paper is loaded with the printable side facing up. Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side. Check 6: Is the Platen Glass or the glass of ADF dirty? Clean the Platen Glass or the glass of ADF.
Colors Are Unclear Page 926 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Colors Are Unclear Colors Are Unclear Check 1: Enable color correction. When printing photographs or other graphics, enabling color correction in the printer driver may improve color. Select Vivid Photo in the Effects sheet in the printer driver setup window.
Lines Are Misaligned Page 927 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Lines Are Misaligned Lines Are Misaligned Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Perform Print Head Alignment. If you did not align the Print Head after installation, straight lines may be printed misaligned.
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Page 928 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: If the intensity is set high, reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 929 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Are Smudged Printed Surface Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Is the appropriate type of paper used? Check the followings: Check to
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 930 of 1086 pages 1. Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below. 2. Check that the paper is now flat. We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time. Note Depending on the media type, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0.1 inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 931 of 1086 pages software. 2. On the Main sheet, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and then click Set. 3. Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity. When copying Setting Items Check 6: Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area? If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper, the lower edge of the paper may become stained with ink.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 932 of 1086 pages Depending on the media type, the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from the Rear Tray. In this case, load one sheet at a time.
Back of the Paper Is Smudged Page 933 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Back of the Paper Is Smudged Back of the Paper Is Smudged Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Page 934 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Check 1: Did you confirm the paper type and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Is the size of the loaded paper correct? The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 935 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven Colors Are Streaked Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2: Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 936 of 1086 pages Check 3: Perform Print Head Alignment. Aligning the Print Head Note If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position .
Printing Does Not Start Page 937 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Printing Does Not Start Printing Does Not Start Check 1: Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in, then turn the machine on. While any lamp on the Operation Panel is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the lamp stops flashing and remains lit. Note When printing large data such as a photo or graphics, it may take longer to start printing.
Printing Does Not Start Page 938 of 1086 pages 4. Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings. Make sure that a port named USBnnn (where "n" is a number) with Canon XXX Printer appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s). Note When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx".
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Page 939 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Check 1: Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period? If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the Print Head may overheat. To protect the Print Head, the machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing.
Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Page 940 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Check 1: Are the Print Head nozzles clogged? Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles. Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.
Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Page 941 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Check 1: Is printing performed in Quiet Mode? Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode on the computer or Operation Panel. For faster printing, do not print in Quiet Mode. For information to make settings on the computer, refer to Reducing the Machine Noise .
FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Page 942 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Check 1: Are all lamps on the Operation Panel off? Check if any lamp on the Operation Panel is lit. The FINE Cartridge Holder will not move unless the power is on.
Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 943 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed Properly Check 1: Make sure of the following when you load paper. When loading two or more sheets of paper, flip through the paper before loading. When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading. When loading two or more sheets of paper, make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit.
Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 944 of 1086 pages If the paper tears in the Rear Tray, see Paper Jams to remove it. If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray, be sure to turn off the machine, unplug it from the power supply, then remove the foreign object. Check 5: Clean the Paper Feed Roller. Routine Maintenance Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.
Paper Jams Page 945 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams Paper Jams Important While the machine is receiving a fax (in memory), you cannot turn off the machine. Turn it off after receiving the fax. Do not disconnect the power plug while the machine is receiving a fax. If you disconnect the power plug, all the documents stored in memory are deleted.
Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Page 946 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Remove the paper following the procedure below. 1. Slowly pull the paper out, either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot, whichever is easier.
In Other Cases Page 947 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > In Other Cases In Other Cases Make sure of the following: Check 1: Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot? Check 2: Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray? If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray, be sure to turn off the machine, unplug it from the power supply, then remove the foreign object. Check 3: Is the paper curled? Check 3: Load the paper after correcting its curl.
Document Jams in the ADF Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Document Jams in the ADF Document Jams in the ADF Important When you turn off the machine to remove the jammed document, make sure of the following. While the machine is receiving a fax (in memory), you cannot turn off the machine. Turn it off after receiving the fax. Do not disconnect the power plug while the machine is receiving a fax. If you disconnect the power plug, all the documents stored in memory are deleted.
Document Jams in the ADF 5. Page 949 of 1086 pages Close the Document Feeder Cover, then turn on the machine. When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page. If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 950 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Message Appears on the Computer Screen Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center. Is Displayed Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error Check 1: If all the lamps on the Operation Panel are off, make sure that the power plug is plugged in, then turn the machine on. While any lamp on the Operation Panel is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the lamp on the Operation Panel stops flashing and remains lit. Check 2: Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen and select MP Drivers to install again. Check 5: When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, check the status of the device on your computer. Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device. 1. Click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, then Device Manager. If the User Account Control screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen If you agree to participate in the survey program: Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again. Note When the information is being sent, a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed.
Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 954 of 1086 pages 3. Select Change. If you select Yes after you have followed the on-screen instructions, the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey. If you select No, the information will be sent automatically. Note If you select Uninstall (or Remove), the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is uninstalled. Follow the on-screen instructions.
For Windows Users Page 955 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > For Windows Users For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Check: Is the printer status monitor enabled? Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor. 1. Open the printer driver setup window. Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 2. On the Maintenance sheet, click View Printer Status. 3.
For Windows Users 3. Page 956 of 1086 pages Select WIA Canon XXX ser, then click the Properties button. If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue. 4. Click the Events tab on the WIA Canon XXX ser Properties screen. 5. Select Start this program for Actions, then select MP Navigator EX Ver3.1 from the pull-down menu. Choose an event from the Select an event pull-down menu, then select MP Navigator EX Ver3.1 to launch for each event. If MP Navigator EX Ver3.
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 957 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them. Note This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon-brand PictBridge compliant devices.
Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device Page 958 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device Check: Is printing possible through Bluetooth communication? Printing via Bluetooth Communication Page top
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet. Is Displayed Check: Check the following, press the OK button, then perform the Scan sheet and print menu again.
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet Page 960 of 1086 pages Important If the memory card or USB flash drive is removed while printing, the stored data may be damaged or the selected photo may not be printed as the reading of the photo on the memory card or USB flash drive and the printing of the photo are simultaneous.
Cannot Remove a Memory Card Page 961 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Remove a Memory Card Cannot Remove a Memory Card Contact the service center. Important Never attempt to remove a memory card using a thin stick or tweezers. Doing so may damage the machine. Note Exclusive adapters are required for the following memory cards. Insert these cards in the machine with adapters attached.
Problems with Scanning Page 962 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning Problems with Scanning Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Slow Scanning Speed "There is not enough memory.
Scanner Does Not Work Page 963 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work Scanner Does Not Work Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer. Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer. Check 4: Restart the computer.
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Page 964 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Check 1: Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed. If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and install MP Drivers. Check 2: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine.
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not... Page 965 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Page 966 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Check 1: Increase the scanning resolution. Resolution Check 2: Set the scale to 100%. Some applications do not display images clearly if the image is too small. Check 3: If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and scan again.
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Page 967 of 1086 pages On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None. Image Settings On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear, set Color Matching.
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Page 968 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Check: Specify the scan area. (Auto Crop) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the Click cropping frame (scan area) according to the document size.
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Page 969 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Scan each item individually. Some applications do not support multiple image scanning.
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Page 970 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Multiple image scanning may not be supported. Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.
Slow Scanning Speed Page 971 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Slow Scanning Speed Slow Scanning Speed Check 1: To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi. Resolution Check 2: Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None. Image Settings Check 3: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document / Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Page 972 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Check 1: Exit other applications and try again. Check 2: Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Page 973 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Check 1: Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again. Check 2: Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space, then scan again.
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Page 974 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows Check: Disconnect the USB cable, then uninstall and reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX. Step 1: Uninstall the MP Drivers. See "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers " for details. Step 2: Uninstall MP Navigator EX. 1.
Software Problems Page 975 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems Software Problems E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Does Not Open Page top
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen fo... Page 976 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program Check 1: MP Navigator EX may not support the e-mail software program. The following e-mail software programs are supported.
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Page 977 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced) Check: Set the printing size in the application.
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Page 978 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Check 1: Change the display setting in the application. For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application. Note You cannot reduce the image size in Paint.
Scanned Image Does Not Open Page 979 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Does Not Open Scanned Image Does Not Open Check: If the file format is not supported by the application, scan the image again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG. For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application.
MP Navigator EX Problems Page 980 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems MP Navigator EX Problems Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Page top
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Page 981 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen. Placing Documents Check 2: Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again. If the matching size is not found, scan at a larger size and trim the image. See the Toolbar ( (Trimming)) in " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details.
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning ... Page 982 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Page 983 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document checkbox and scan again.
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned I... Page 984 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
Problems with Faxing Page 985 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Faxing Problems with Faxing This section mainly describes the problems you may encounter when using a fax. Problems Receiving Faxes Problems Sending Faxes Telephone Problems Note For details on messages for faxing displayed on the LCD, see A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the LCD .
Problems Receiving Faxes Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems Receiving Faxes Problems Receiving Faxes Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax Calls Quality of Received Fax is Poor Cannot Receive a Color Fax Errors Often Occur When You Receive a Fax Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax Check 1: Is the power turned on? You cannot receive faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
Problems Receiving Faxes Check 8: Has the ink run out? If the ink has run out, received faxes will be stored in memory without being printed. Check the ink level and take the appropriate action, then print the faxes in memory. Document Stored in Memory Note If the machine was receiving faxes in the fax mode, printing will start automatically after checking the ink level and taking appropriate action. For details, refer to Routine Maintenance .
Problems Receiving Faxes Page 988 of 1086 pages Check 3: Is the sender's original document or the scanning area of the sender's fax machine dirty? The image quality of the fax is mainly determined by the sender's fax machine. Contact the sender and ask the sender to check whether the scanning area of the fax machine is dirty.
Problems Sending Faxes Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems Sending Faxes Problems Sending Faxes Cannot Send a Fax Cannot Perform Sequential Broadcasting by Redialing, or Cannot Dial Using the Numeric Buttons Cannot Send a Fax Clearly Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax Cannot Send a Fax Check 1: Is the power turned on? You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
Problems Sending Faxes Page 990 of 1086 pages Check that the telephone line is connected correctly to the proper jack. If so, then there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your telephone company. Check 10: Is the document loaded properly? Remove the document, then reload it on the Platen Glass or in the ADF. Loading Paper / Originals Check 11: Does a printer error occur? Check the error message on the LCD, then resolve the problem.
Problems Sending Faxes Page 991 of 1086 pages Page top
Telephone Problems Page 992 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Telephone Problems Telephone Problems Cannot Dial Telephone Disconnects During a Call Cannot Dial Check 1: Is the telephone line connected correctly? Check that the telephone line is connected correctly. Refer to your setup manual. Check 2: Is the telephone line type set correctly? Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Page 993 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the seller of the machine or the service center. Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers. Caution If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately.
FAQs Page 994 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > FAQs FAQs No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Cannot Install the MP Drivers Printing Does Not Start Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error Print Results Not Satisfactory Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page top
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Page 995 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver. Restrictions on the Printer Driver With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled.
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) Page 996 of 1086 pages The card slot (memory card) of the machine may become inaccessible. In such cases, restart the machine or turn it off and reconnect the USB cable. Points to Note with Applications There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation). When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify them.
General Notes (Scanner Driver) Page 997 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > General Notes (Scanner Driver) General Notes (Scanner Driver) ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it. Scanner Driver Restrictions When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's administrator for help.
General Notes (Scanner Driver) Page 998 of 1086 pages When scanning platen size images into Microsoft Office 2000/2003 (Word, Excel or PowerPoint) etc., click Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise, images may not be scanned correctly. When scanning images into Microsoft Office 2007 (such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint), use Microsoft Clip Organizer. Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications.
General Notes (Fax Driver) Page 999 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > General Notes (Fax Driver) General Notes (Fax Driver) This fax driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the fax driver. Microsoft Excel 2002 may not always work correctly when sending a document as a fax using the fax driver and with the option Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing. Follow the instructions below to solve the problem: 1. Click Options... from the Tools menu.
Appendix Page 1000 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix Appendix Printing Area Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Deleting the Undesired Print Job Updating the MP Drivers Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals Transporting the Machine Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Page top
Printing Area Page 1001 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area Printing Area To ensure the best print quality, the machine allows a margin along each edge of media. The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins. Recommended printing area Printable area : Canon recommends that you print within this area. : The area where it is possible to print. However, printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision.
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes Page 1002 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes Size Printable Area (width x height) A5 5.56 x 7.95 inches / 141.2 x 202.0 mm A4 8.00 x 11.38 inches / 203.2 x 289.0 mm B5 6.90 x 9.80 inches / 175.2 x 249.0 mm 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm 3.73 x 5.69 inches / 94.8 x 144.4 mm 4" x 8" / 10 x 20 cm* 3.73 x 7.69 inches / 94.8 x 195.2 mm 5" x 7" / 13 x 18 cm 4.
Letter, Legal Page 1003 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Letter, Legal Letter, Legal Size Printable Area (width x height) Letter 8.00 x 10.69 inches / 203.2 x 271.4 mm Legal 8.00 x 13.69 inches / 203.2 x 347.
Envelopes Page 1004 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Envelopes Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area (width x height) European DL* 4.06 x 7.07 inches / 103.2 x 179.5 mm US Comm. Env. #10* 3.86 x 7.91 inches / 98.0 x 200.8 mm * This page size can be used only when printing from your computer.
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 1005 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History This function is unavailable when the standard IJ printer driver is used. In the Canon IJ XPS preview window, you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print history to print the document.
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 1006 of 1086 pages 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. The Canon IJ XPS Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing. 4. Editing print documents and print pages Combining print documents You can combine multiple print documents to form a single document.
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 1007 of 1086 pages Reprinting from the Print History When you click Save Print History on the File menu to enable the setting, the document printed from the preview is saved, and you can reprint the document with the same settings. 1. Displaying the print history Select the Start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" -> View Print History XPS. The saved print document is displayed in the preview.
Deleting the Undesired Print Job Page 1008 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Deleting the Undesired Print Job Deleting the Undesired Print Job If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. If the printer does not start printing, the print job data cancelled or failed may be remaining. Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor. 1.
Updating the MP Drivers Page 1009 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers Page top
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Page 1010 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers The MP Drivers include a printer driver, scanner driver (ScanGear), and fax driver. By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved. Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Page 1011 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers The MP Drivers you no longer use can be deleted. When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running. The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows: When There is an Uninstaller 1.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Page 1012 of 1086 pages If you are using Windows 7, when the confirmation message appears, click Yes. Then when the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes. The icon is deleted. If you are using Windows Vista, when the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue. Then when the confirmation message appears, click Yes. The icon is deleted. 3. Select the printer driver to be deleted If you are using Windows 7, click any icon in Printers and Faxes.
Before Installing the MP Drivers Page 1013 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Before Installing the MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed. Checking the Machine Status Properly connect the personal computer and the machine.
Installing the MP Drivers Page 1014 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows: 1. Turn off the machine 2. Start the installer Double-click the icon of the downloaded file. The installation program starts.
Installing the MP Drivers Page 1015 of 1086 pages Page top
Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals Page 1016 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on-screen manuals from your computer. Before uninstalling the on-screen manuals, exit all on-screen manuals that are opening. 1. Click Start > All Programs (Programs in Windows 2000) > Canon XXX Manual (where "XXX " is your machine's name) > Uninstall. 2.
Transporting the Machine Page 1017 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Transporting the Machine Transporting the Machine When relocating the machine, pack the machine using the original packing materials. If you do not have the original packing materials, pack the machine carefully using protective material and place it inside a sturdy box. Important Do not transport or store the machine slanted, vertically, or upside-down, as the ink may leak and damage the machine. 1. Turn the machine off. 2.
Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 1018 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Appendix > Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows. Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing. 1.
Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Advanced Guide > Appendix > Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord To unplug the power cord, follow the procedure below. Important Confirm that all lamps on the Operation Panel are off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the power cord. Unplugging the power cord while the machine is still on may cause drying or clogging of the Print Head and print quality may be reduced.
Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Page 1020 of 1086 pages Page top
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 1021 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX --- Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art --Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras. You can also print borderless photos easily. Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX Click Here: Easy-PhotoPrint EX Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 1022 of 1086 pages CHECK! Select Album to add text and frames. You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print. Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Create your own calendar using your favorite photos! It'll be exciting to turn the calendar pages. You can use all kinds of photos. You can also create 2-month, 6-month and 12-month calendars.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX Page 1023 of 1086 pages Page top
Using MP Navigator EX Page 1024 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > Using MP Navigator EX Using MP Navigator EX MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable even for beginners. Start MP Navigator EX Click Here: MP Navigator EX Note See "Let's Try Scanning" for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX. Scan Photos and Documents You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens.
Using MP Navigator EX Page 1025 of 1086 pages Scan with One-click In One-click Mode, MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving, with a click of an icon. One-click Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e-mail automatically. Scan and Correct/Enhance Photos You can easily correct/enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX. You do not need to use other applications.
About Solution Menu Page 1026 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Solution Menu About Solution Menu Quick Shortcut!! Solution Menu Solution Menu is a menu window that provides quick access from your desktop to Canon applications, manuals, and online product information. Important The number and types of buttons displayed in the window may vary depending on your printer and region. Starting Solution Menu Click Here: Solution Menu To start from desktop, see below.
About Solution Menu Page 1027 of 1086 pages (large or small). Solution Menu opens with the last used window size next time it is started. When window size is small Starting an Application 1. Point to a button on the window to display the description of each application. 2. By clicking each button, the introduced application starts. Follow the same steps to view the manuals or online product information. Important Internet connection is required to access the online information.
About Network Communication Page 1028 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication About Network Communication Changing and Confirming Network Settings Troubleshooting Appendix Glossary Page top
Changing and Confirming Network Settings Page 1029 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings Changing and Confirming Network Settings Canon IJ Network Tool Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Monitoring Wireless Network Status Initializ
Canon IJ Network Tool Page 1030 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Canon IJ Network Tool Canon IJ Network Tool The Canon IJ Network Tool is a utility that enables you to display and modify the machine network settings. It is installed when the machine is set up. Important Do not start up the Canon IJ Network Tool while printing. Do not print when the Canon IJ Network Tool is running.
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box Page 1031 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box This section describes the items displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box. Important To use the machine over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection type, such as an access point or a LAN cable. 1.
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box Page 1032 of 1086 pages You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found. This item has the same function as Configuration in the Settings menu.
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Page 1033 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Canon IJ Network Tool Menus This section describes the menus in the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box. 1. File menu Exit Exits the Canon IJ Network Tool. 2. View menu Status Displays the Status dialog box to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication status.
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Page 1034 of 1086 pages unavailable for printing. 3. Settings menu Configuration Displays the Configuration dialog box to configure settings of the selected printer. Note This item has the same function as Configuration in the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box. Associate Port Displays the Associate Port dialog box and you can associate a port with the printer. This menu is available when No Driver is displayed for the selected printer.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Page 1035 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Page 1036 of 1086 pages 3. Search The Search dialog box is displayed to select an access point to connect to. Search dialog box Note When the Canon IJ Network Tool runs over a LAN, the button is grayed out and cannot be selected. Connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily to change the settings. 4. Encryption Method Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Page 1037 of 1086 pages 1. Detected Access Points The signal strength from the access point, encryption type, name of access point, and the radio channel can be confirmed. Important If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party. Note Signal strength is displayed as follows. : Good : Fair : Poor Type of encryption is displayed as follows.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Page 1038 of 1086 pages Specify the printer WEP settings. When changing the password (WEP key), the same change must be made to the password (WEP key) of the access point. 1. WEP Key Enter the same key as the one set to the access point. The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the key length and key format.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Page 1039 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Page 1040 of 1086 pages 1. Authentication Type Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed. This machine supports the PSK authentication method. PSK This authentication type uses a passphrase entered in the next screen. 8. Enter the passphrase, confirm the type of dynamic encryption and click Next. 1. Passphrase Enter the passphrase set to the access point.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings Page 1041 of 1086 pages Important If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point matches that set to the printer.
Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet Page 1042 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet Note Select Wired LAN active in the Change wireless/wired on the Operation Panel to change the settings in the Wired LAN sheet. Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD 1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool. Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool 2.
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Page 1043 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet 1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool. Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool 2. Select the printer in Printers. 3. Select Configuration from the Settings menu. 4. Click the Admin Password tab. 1.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status Page 1044 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Monitoring Wireless Network Status Monitoring Wireless Network Status Note When using the printer over the Wired LAN, Signal Strength, Link Quality, or Advanced Measurement is not available. 1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool. Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool 2. Select the printer in Printers. 3. Select Status from the View menu. 1.
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Page 1045 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Important Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, printing, scanning, or faxing operation from a computer over network may become impossible.
Viewing the Modified Settings Page 1046 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Viewing the Modified Settings Viewing the Modified Settings The Confirmation dialog box is displayed when you modified the printer settings on the Configuration dialog box. When you click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box, the following screen is displayed for confirming the modified settings. 1.
Printing Out Network Setting Information Page 1047 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Printing Out Network Setting Information Printing Out Network Setting Information You can print out the network settings of the machine such as its IP address and SSID. Important This print out contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
Printing Out Network Setting Information Page 1048 of 1086 pages Wired LAN Wired LAN Enable/Disable Link Status Status of the Wired LAN Active/Inactive MAC Address MAC Address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX TCP/IP Version TCP/IP Version IPv4/IPv6 IP Address IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Default Gateway Default Gateway XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Subnet Mask*1 Subnet Mask XXX.XXX.XXX.
Troubleshooting Page 1049 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate Cannot Print, Scan, Fax, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start The Admin Password
Troubleshooting Page 1050 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting tips for problems you may encounter when using the machine. For troubleshooting tips related to the setup, refer to the Network Setup Troubleshooting .
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Page 1051 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/ Passphrase How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP/ WPA/WPA2 Key) How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key) For information on
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password/Passphrase Page 1052 of 1086 pages Page top
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1053 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Cannot Communicate with the Machine After Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering a WEP/ WPA/WPA2 Key to the Access Point Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are Changed Cannot Connect to
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1054 of 1086 pages Check 3: If a network key is set to the access point, set the machine to match it. How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Check 4: Make sure that the valid wireless channel is used. The wireless channel to be used may be limited depending on wireless network devices installed in the computer. Refer to the manual provided with your computer or your wireless network device to specify the valid wireless channel.
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Is Change wireless/wired in Device settings set to Wireless LAN active or Wired LAN active? Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD Check 3: When using wired LAN, make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly. Check 4: When using wireless LAN, make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with those of the access point.
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine point and the machine. The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Network Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check 2: Make sure that the USB cable is connected properly. Refer to the setup manual of the machine to connect the USB cable properly. Check 3: Make sure that the machine setup is completed. If not, refer to your setup manual of the machine to complete the machine setup.
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine Page 1057 of 1086 pages set the security software to always allow access. If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some programs will enable a firewall by default. Check 14: When using a router, connect the printer and computer to the LAN side (same network segment).
The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup Page 1058 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup The Enter Password Dialog Box Is Displayed During Setup The Dialog Box for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Access Point in the Search Dialog Box "You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed The Enter Password Dialo
Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate Page 1059 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate Use the printer driver with bidirectional communication. Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
Cannot Print, Scan, Fax, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connect... Page 1060 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print, Scan, Fax, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network Cannot Print, Scan, Fax, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network Check 1: Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start Page 1061 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start Check 1: The machine may be printing out or scanning a large job issued from another computer. Check 2: Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions while monitoring the radio status with Canon IJ Network Tool.
The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten Page 1062 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten Initialize the LAN settings. Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default After initializing the LAN settings, refer to your setup manual of the machine to set up the machine again.
Checking Information about the Network Page 1063 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Checking Information about the Network Checking Information about the Network Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Access Point Can Communicate Checking the Network Setting Information Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Ma
Checking Information about the Network Page 1064 of 1086 pages Page top
Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default Page 1065 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default Important Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing, scanning, or faxing operation from a computer over network may become impossible.
Updating the MP Drivers Page 1066 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Updating the MP Drivers Updating the MP Drivers Download the latest MP Drivers in advance. To obtain the latest MP Drivers, access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. After uninstalling the MP Drivers, install the latest MP Drivers according to the regular procedure.
Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Page 1067 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool Follow the procedure below to uninstall the Canon IJ Network Tool from your computer.
Cannot Mount the Card Slot Page 1068 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Mount the Card Slot Cannot Mount the Card Slot The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the Card Slot Dialog Box The Card Slot Cannot Be Mounted with the Canon IJ Network Tool The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the Card Slot Dialog Box On this dialog box, only D to Z can be selected as the network drive for the Card Sl
Cannot Use the Card Slot Page 1069 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Use the Card Slot Cannot Use the Card Slot Check 1: Is the icon of the Card Slot displayed? To use the Card Slot over network, you have to mount the Card Slot as the network drive of the computer. The canon_memory (\\xxxxxxxxxxxx) (or canon_memory on `xxxxxxxxxxxx') icon with the mapped drive letter appears on Computer (or My Computer).
Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigator EX Page 1070 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigator EX Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigator EX If "Cannot access the memory card" is displayed when you click Memory Card under Scan/Import Documents or Images on MP Navigator EX, confirm what the message says, then click Retry.
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the C... Page 1071 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Computer Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Computer Check 1: Make sure that Read/write attribute in Device settings is set to Writable from LAN PC.
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the C... Page 1072 of 1086 pages 2. Click the Advanced settings. If the User Account Control screen is displayed, click Yes. 3. Right-click Inbound Rules, then select New Rule. If you set outbound rules, right-click Outbound Rules. 4. Select Port, then click Next. 5. Select TCP, then select Special local ports: and input "137", then click Next. If you open UDP ports, select UDP.
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the C... Page 1073 of 1086 pages 1. Right-click Computer, select Properties, then click Change settings. In Windows XP, right-click My Computer, then select Properties. 2. Click the Computer Name tab, then click Change. 3. Change the workgroup name to "WORKGROUP", then click OK. Check 6: Disconnect the network drive for the Card Slot and mount it again following the procedure below. 1.
Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the Memory Card ov...
Appendix Page 1075 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix Appendix Restrictions Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) Using the Card Slot over a Network Page top
Restrictions Page 1076 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Restrictions Restrictions If you use a printer over the wireless LAN, the printer may recognize nearby wireless systems, you should set a network key (WEP, WPA, or WPA2) to the access point to encrypt wireless transmission. Wireless communication with a product that does not comply with the Wi-Fi standard cannot be guaranteed.
Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) Page 1077 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) Initial Values Set at Factory (Network) Initial Values Item Change wireless/wired Disable LAN SSID BJNPSETUP Communication mode Infrastructure Wireless Security Disable IP address Getting automatically Printer name setting* XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX IPv4/IPv6 setting IPv4 Set memory card sharing Enable Enable/disable WSD (WSD settings) E
Using the Card Slot over a Network Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Using the Card Slot over a Network Using the Card Slot over a Network Confirming Whether the Card Slot is Mounted Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network Confirming Whether the Card Slot is Mounted The Card Slot must be mounted to use it over a network. When the Card Slot is mounted, the following icon appears on Computer (or My Computer).
Using the Card Slot over a Network 6. Confirm that the Computer). Page 1079 of 1086 pages canon_memory icon for the Card Slot appears on Computer (or My Note If the Card Slot cannot be mounted properly, see Cannot Mount the Card Slot. Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network The Card Slot can be shared by multiple computers, if the machine is connected to a network. Multiple computers can read files from a memory card in the Card Slot at the same time.
Using the Card Slot over a Network Page 1080 of 1086 pages to the Internet via a router. For information on using a router, contact your Internet service provider or a network device manufacturer. If you write files to a memory card over a network when the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is not running, the Date Modified of the files may not be proper. Make sure to start up the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility before you write files to a memory card over the network.
Glossary Page 1081 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Glossary Glossary About Technical Terms Page top
About Technical Terms Page 1082 of 1086 pages Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Glossary > About Technical Terms About Technical Terms In this section, technical terms used in the manual are explained. A B C D F I K L M O P R S T U W A Access Point A wireless transceiver or base station that receives information from wireless clients/the machine and rebroadcasts it. Required in an infrastructure network.
About Technical Terms Page 1083 of 1086 pages point. Open System In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated without using WEP key even if "Use WEP" is selected. Shared Key In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated using the WEP key that was set for encryption. B Bonjour A service built into Mac OS X operating system to detect the connectable devices on a network automatically. C Channel Frequency channel for wireless communication.
About Technical Terms Page 1084 of 1086 pages automatically. For the procedure to check the IP address of the printer, see Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine . IPv4/IPv6 They are internetwork-layer protocol used on the internet. IPv4 uses 32-bit addresses and IPv6 uses 128-bit addresses. K Key Format Select either ASCII or Hex as the WEP key format. The character that can be used for the WEP key differs depending on the selected key formats.
About Technical Terms PSK An encryption method employed by WPA/WPA2. R Router A relay device to connect to another network. S Signal Strength The strength of the signal received by the printer from the access point is indicated with a value from 0 to 100%. SSID Unique label for wireless LAN. It is often represented such as a network name or an access point name. SSID distinguishes one wireless LAN from another to prevent interference.
About Technical Terms Page 1086 of 1086 pages WEP/WEP Key An encryption method employed by IEEE 802.11. Shared security key used to encrypt and decrypt data sent over wireless networks. This printer supports key length of 64 bits or 128 bits, key format of ASCII code or Hexadecimal, and key number of 1 to 4. Wi-Fi International association that certifies interoperability of wireless LAN products based on the IEEE 802.11 specification. This machine is a Wi-Fi authorized product.